Introduction 9
Child Safety 17
Child seats ...........................................19
Child seat positioning ...................................19
Booster seats .........................................21
Installing child seats with lap and shoulder belts................23
Installing child safety seats with lower anchors and tethers for
children.............................................27
Installing child safety seats with tether straps..................29
Safety Belts 33
Fastening the safety belts ................................35
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................38
Safety belt-minder .....................................39
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................41
Personal Safety System 42
Supplementary Restraints System 43
Driver and passenger airbags..............................45
Front passenger sensing system............................46
Side airbags ..........................................50
Crash sensors and airbag indicator..........................52
Airbag disposal ........................................53
Keys and Remote Control 54
General information on radio frequencies .....................54
Remote control........................................54
Keys ...............................................54
Replacing a lost key or remote control .......................56
Table of Contents 1
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey 57
Settings, MyKey .......................................57
Creating.............................................58
Clearing .............................................58
System status .........................................59
Remote start, MyKey ...................................59
Troubleshooting, MyKey .................................61
Locks 63
Locking and unlocking ..................................63
Interior luggage compartment release .......................67
Security 68
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system .......................68
Anti-theft system ......................................70
Steering Wheel 73
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................73
Steering wheel controls..................................74
Wipers and Washers 76
Windshield wipers......................................76
Windshield washers.....................................76
Lighting 77
Lighting control .......................................77
Autolamps ...........................................78
Instrument lighting dimmer ...............................78
Headlamp exit delay ....................................79
Daytime running lamps ..................................80
Front fog lamps .......................................80
Directionindicators ....................................81
Interior lamps.........................................81
2 Table of Contents
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Windows and Mirrors 82
Power windows .......................................82
Exteriormirrors.......................................84
Interiormirrors........................................86
Sun visors ...........................................86
Sunshade ............................................88
Instrument Cluster 89
Gauges..............................................89
Warning lamps and indicators .............................91
Audible warnings and indicators ...........................95
Information Displays 96
Controls .............................................96
Information messages ..................................111
Audio System 117
AM/FM stereo with CD/MP3..............................119
Auxiliary input jack....................................124
USBport...........................................126
Satellite radio information ...............................127
Climate Control 130
Manual heating and air conditioning ........................130
Navigation system based climate control.....................132
Rear window defroster .................................136
Cabin air filter .......................................136
Seats 137
Sitting in the correct position ............................137
Head restraints .......................................138
Manual seats.........................................140
Power seats .........................................142
Heated seats.........................................143
Rear seats ..........................................144
Table of Contents 3
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Universal Garage Door Opener 146
Car2U威 home automation system..........................146
Auxiliary Power Points 150
Storage Compartments 151
Center console .......................................151
Starting and Stopping the Engine 152
Ignition switch .......................................153
Engine block heater ...................................154
Fuel and Refueling 156
Fuel quality .........................................157
Running out of fuel ....................................158
Refueling...........................................159
Fuel consumption .....................................161
Transmission 165
Transmission operation .................................165
Automatic transmission .................................165
Manual transmission ...................................168
Hill start assist .......................................171
Brakes 173
Brakes .............................................173
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................174
Parking brake ........................................174
Traction Control 175
TractionControl™ ....................................175
Stability Control 176
AdvanceTrac威 ........................................178
4 Table of Contents
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Parking Aids 179
Sensing system .......................................179
Rear-view camera system ...............................180
Cruise Control 183
Driving Aids 185
Steering............................................185
Load Carrying 187
Vehicle loading .......................................187
Towing 194
Trailertowing........................................194
Wrecker towing.......................................196
Recreational towing....................................197
Convertible Top 198
Driving Hints 203
Economical driving ....................................203
Floormats..........................................205
Roadside Emergencies 207
Getting roadside assistance ..............................207
Hazard warning flashers ................................208
Fuel cut-off switch ....................................209
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................209
Customer Assistance 212
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)........................219
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................219
Fuses 220
Changing a fuse ......................................220
Fuse specification chart.................................221
Table of Contents 5
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance 227
General information ...................................227
Opening and closing the hood ............................228
Under hood overview ..................................229
Engine compartment...................................229
Engine oil dipstick ....................................231
Engine oil check ......................................231
Engine coolant check ..................................232
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................236
Brake fluid check .....................................237
Power steering fluid check ..............................237
Washer fluid check ....................................238
Battery.............................................238
Checking the wiper blades...............................240
Air filter(s)..........................................241
Adjusting the headlamps ................................242
Changing a bulb ......................................243
Vehicle Care 248
Cleaning products .....................................248
Cleaning the exterior...................................248
Waxing.............................................250
Repairing minor paint damage ............................250
Cleaning the engine ...................................250
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................251
Cleaning the interior ...................................252
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......252
Cleaning leather seats ..................................253
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................254
Vehicle storage .......................................254
6 Table of Contents
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires 257
Tire care ...........................................257
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....................273
Changing a road wheel .................................277
Temporary mobility kit .................................282
Technical specifications .................................290
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................290
Capacities and Specifications 291
Engine specifications...................................291
Engine drivebelt ......................................291
Part numbers........................................295
Vehicle identification number.............................296
Vehicle certification label................................297
Transmission code designation............................297
Accessories 298
Accessories..........................................298
Ford Extended Service Plan 300
Scheduled Maintenance 304
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................309
SYNC姞 321
Pairing your phone for the first time .......................326
911 Assist™ .........................................337
Vehicle Health Report ..................................340
Table of Contents 7
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System 358
Status bars ..........................................364
Loading pictures ......................................365
Voice recognition .....................................367
Accessing media features ...............................372
Jukebox features......................................392
Recording (saving) music to your jukebox ...................392
Accessing the music in your jukebox .......................392
Creating a playlist .....................................394
Where am I? .........................................398
Accessing the help screen ...............................402
Navigation features ....................................403
Appendices 412
Index 430
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
8 Table of Contents
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using
and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle.. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
Introduction 9
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety alert See Owner’s
Manual
Anti-lock
braking
system
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Battery Battery acid
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Brake system Cabin air
filter
Check fuel
cap
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Child seat
lower anchor
Child seat
tether anchor
Cruise
control
Do not open
when hot
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine
coolant
temperature
Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag Front fog
lamps
Fuel pump
reset
Fuse
compartment
Hazard
warning
flasher
10 Introduction
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Heated rear
window
Interior
luggage
compartment
release
Jack
Lighting
control
Low tire
pressure
warning
Maintain
correct fluid
level
Panic alarm Parking aid
system
Parking
brake system
Power
steering fluid
Power
windows
front and
rear
Power
window
lockout
Service
engine soon
Side airbag Stability
control
Windshield
defrost and
demist
Windshield
washer and
wiper
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information
may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford
authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be
used for any purpose. See your SYNC威 supplement for more information.
Introduction 11
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information
without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other government authorities
or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
12 Introduction
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC威 or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC威 chapter for more information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威
supplement for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, safety
belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate
material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for more
information.
Introduction 13
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well as
help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access Account
Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for
the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides
years of service is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed
in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or
exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision but, accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent
requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine
Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement
parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to your vehicle
as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered by the
Ford Warranty. For additional information, refer to the terms and
conditions of the Ford Warranty.
14 Introduction
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the Warranty
Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment
to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Introduction 15
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16 Introduction
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable child
height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in the vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Child Safety 17
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or younger).
Use a child safety
seat (sometimes
called an infant
carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, are greater than age four (4)
and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least
4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by child
restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap
belt snug and low
across the hips,
shoulder belt
centered across the
shoulder and chest,
and seatback upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 ft 9 in.
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
18 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for Infants,
toddlers or children weighing 40 lb
(18 kg) or less (generally age four
or younger)
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine
if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size, height, weight,
or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions and
warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the
instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer. A
safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for
your child’s height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may
increase the risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or
death.
Child Safety 19
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and
top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Forward
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XXX
Forward
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat. See the
Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
20 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg)
and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet
9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap/shoulder
belt.
Child Safety 21
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck
and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child’s hips.
22 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS WITH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
Child Safety 23
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and
feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat back in the upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Step 5.
This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
24 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
Child Safety 25
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in
the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps
to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). Refer to
Installing child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter.
26 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
INSTALLING CHILD SAFETY SEATS WITH Lower Anchors AND
Tethers FOR CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING:
Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child
safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and/or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a
seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The
LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the
center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.
Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk
of injury or death in the event of a collision.
Child Safety 27
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two (2)
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one (1) top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided with
your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower
anchors for child seat installation at
the seating positions marked with
the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at
the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback
below the symbols as shown. Follow
the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
Refer to Installing child safety seats with tether straps later in this
chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
28 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
INSTALLING CHILD SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• Vehicles with rear seats
• Vehicles without rear seats
Child Safety 29
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether anchor:
1. Route the tether strap as follows:
• For coupe with rear seats: Route the tether strap over the top of
the head restraint.
• For coupe without rear seats:
Route the tether strap through
the inboard slot of the front
passenger seat back or route the
tether strap over the top of the
seat. A tether strap extension
may be needed to reach the
tether anchor.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Open the tether anchor cover.
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
30 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For convertible:
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the top of the head
restraint.
The tether anchors are located
rearward of the seatback in the
convertible top sling.
Note: For easier access, attach the
tether with the convertible top up.
Note: The attachments for the
convertible boot located on the back
of the head restraints are not tether
anchors.
Child Safety 31
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Access tether anchors located
behind the seatback under the vinyl
tag marked with the child tether
anchor symbol.
3. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety seat may
not be retained properly in the
event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
32 Child Safety
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
Safety Belts 33
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
WARNING: The center of the rear seat is NOT designed as a
seating position and is not equipped with safety belts. The
LATCH anchors were not designed to be used with a child seat in the
center position and there is no tether anchor available at the center.
Attempted use of the center as a seating position will increase the risk
of injury or death in the event of a collision.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
• Retractor pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. Refer to Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in
the Supplemental Restraint System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side collisions. The safety belt pretensioners on the
retractor and anchor at the front seating positions are designed to
tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In
frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or,
if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
34 Safety Belts
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
The presenter arm (available on the coupe only) is intended to improve
access to the safety belt and to allow access to the rear seat.
Rotate the presenter arm toward the
front of the vehicle until it locks
into place. This allows easier access
to the front safety belt for the front
seat occupant.
To access the second row seats,
rotate the arm back to its original
position against the trim panel.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Safety Belts 35
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belt. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking
retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the front
outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
36 Safety Belts
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. Refer to the Child Safety chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belts 37
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
38 Safety Belts
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT-MINDER姞
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s or front passenger’s seat is
occupied and the safety belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in
need of a warning. To avoid activating the Belt-Minder威 feature for objects
placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to large
front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder威 warnings have expired (warnings for approximately
five minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other
occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder威 feature.
If... Then...
The driver’s and front
passenger’s safety belts are
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The driver’s or front passenger’s
safety belt is not buckled when
the vehicle has reached at least
6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for six
seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until the
safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s or front passenger’s
safety belt becomes unbuckled
for approximately one minute
while the vehicle is traveling at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more
than 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has
been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated -
the safety belt warning light illuminates
and the warning chime sounds for six
seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until the
safety belts are buckled.
Safety Belts 39
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder姞 Feature
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate
the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 are deactivated and
activated independently. When deactivating or activating one seating
position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the
process.
Note: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features must be
disabled and enabled separately. Both cannot be disable or enabled
during the same key cycle.
Note: If you are using MyKey威, the Belt-Minder威 cannot be disabled.
Also, if the Belt-Minder威 has been previously disabled, it will be
re-enabled during the use of MyKey威. Refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
Read Steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation
or activation programming procedure.
The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder威 features can be deactivated
or activated by performing the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in position P (automatic transmission)
• The gearshift is in neutral (manual transmission)
• The ignition is on
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled
1. Turn the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately one
minute).
• Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
40 Safety Belts
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. For the seating position being disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled
state. Step 3 must be completed within 30 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
• After Step 3, the restraint system warning light (airbag light) will be
turned on for three seconds.
4. Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off, buckle
then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds.
• This will enable the Belt-Minder威 feature for that seating position if it
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning
light will flash four times per second for three seconds, followed by
three seconds with the light off, then followed by the restraint system
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, refer to Cleaning the Interior in
the Vehicle Care chapter.
Safety Belts 41
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PERSONAL SAFETY SYSTEM™
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front passenger sensing system
• Passenger airbag off/on indicator lamp
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, front passenger sensing system, and indicator lights.
How does the Personal Safety System work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module. During a crash, the
Restraints Control Module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
42 Personal Safety System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Supplementary Restraints System 43
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air
bag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate
slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result
from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause
abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a
result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags
must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
(front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy威) or the safety belt
pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button is pressed on the remote entry transmitter, or
• the vehicle runs out of power.
44 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal collisions.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator
later in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in.
(25 cm) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
Supplementary Restraints System 45
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children 12
and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating
position.
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting
in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of possible serious injury:
Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket (if equipped) or
hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between
the seat and the center console (if equipped).
Check the “passenger airbag off” or “pass airbag off” indicator lamp for
proper airbag status.
Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the passenger
seat sensing system.
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing
system.
This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s
seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant
and determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
The front passenger sensing system
uses a ⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or
⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator which will
illuminate and stay lit to remind you
that the front passenger frontal
airbag is disabled. The indicator
lamp is located on the front edge of the map lamps.
Note: The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional.
When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the
event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate), the
indicator lamp will be unlit.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not
inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat,
a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected.
• When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the indicator lamp will illuminate and
stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not
lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)
the front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a
person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the
⬙passenger airbag off⬙ or ⬙pass airbag off⬙ indicator lamp is lit, it is
possible that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the
full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person
and enable the passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Occupant
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Passenger Airbag
Empty seat Unlit Disabled
Small child in child
safety seat or booster
Lit Disabled
Small child with safety
belt buckled or
unbuckled
Lit Disabled
Adult Unlit Enabled
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
48 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the
passenger airbag is disabled, the ⬙pass airbag off⬙ lamp may or may not
be illuminated according to the table below.
Objects
Pass Airbag Off
Indicator Lamp
Passenger Airbag
Small (i.e. three-ring
binder, small purse,
bottled water)
Unlit Disabled
Medium (i.e. heavy
briefcase, fully packed
luggage)
Lit Disabled
Empty seat, or small
to medium object with
safety belt buckled
Lit Disabled
If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is
incorrect, check for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat
• Objects between the seat cushion and the center console (if equipped)
• Objects hanging off the seat back
• Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket (if equipped)
• Objects placed on the occupant’s lap
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat
The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated
occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger sensing
system. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions described in the list above.
To know if the front passenger sensing system is operating
properly, refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
Supplementary Restraints System 49
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the airbag readiness lamp is lit, do the following:
The driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects that may
be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with
the seat.
If objects are lodged and/or cargo is interfering with the seat; please take
the following steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and/or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged
underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness light is
no longer illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated, this may or may/not
be a problem due to the front passenger sensing system.
DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle
immediately to an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer
Assistance section of this owner’s manual.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats),
or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
50 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel indicating
that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the seatback of
the driver and front passenger seatbacks.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. Refer to Crash sensors and Airbag Indicator later
in this chapter.
• Front passenger sensing system
Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger
seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty, unbuckled passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
Supplementary Restraints System 51
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
The vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide
information to the Restraints Control Module which deploys (activates)
the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger airbag and
seat mounted side airbags. Based on the type of accident (frontal impact,
side impact or rollover) the restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. Refer to
Warning lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal or
lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
52 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were
not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the
collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side collisions.
• Side airbags are designed to inflate in side-impact collisions, not
rollovers, rear impacts, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
Supplementary Restraints System 53
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
• remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors
• remotely open the trunk
• arm and disarm the anti-theft system (if equipped)
• activate the panic alarm
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
The remote control complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
The key blade is used to start the
vehicle and unlock or lock the
driver’s door from outside the
vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
54 Keys and Remote Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: If the vehicle is not equipped with active anti-theft system, locking
the driver door with the key does not lock the passenger door. Use the
power door lock, remote control or manually lock the passenger door to
ensure the vehicle is properly secured.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys were
issued with a security label that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will
chirp and the turn signals will flash. It is recommended that this
method be used to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or turn the ignition on to deactivate.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back
surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.
Keys and Remote Control 55
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key
ring to remove the battery cover (1).
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket (2) from the transmitter if it does
not come off with battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery (3).
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the integrated
keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote controls can be purchased
from your authorized dealer. Your dealer can program the transmitters to
your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. Refer to the
Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters.
3
2
1
56 Keys and Remote Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey威 allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. Any keys that have
not been programmed are referred to as an “administrator key” or
“admin key” which can be used to:
• create a restricted key
• program optional key settings
• clear the key feature altogether.
Once a key has been programmed you can access the following
information using the information display control:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle.
• The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey.
When both a MyKey and an Admin Intelligent Access keys (fob) are
present, the admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the engine.
Standard Settings
These settings cannot be changed.
•
Belt-Minder. This cannot be disabled and the five–minute timer does not
expire. The audio system is muted when MyKey Belt-Minder is activated.
•
Early low fuel. Warnings are displayed in the information display control
followed by an audible tone when the fuel tank is at 1/8 tank or less.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on:
Parking aid, blind spot information system (BLIS) with cross traffic
alert and the collision warning system.
Optional Settings
These settings can be configured right after a MyKey is first created or
changed afterword with an Admin key.
• Vehicle speed limit of 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by an audible tone when vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Vehicle speed warning of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h).
Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when the
preselected vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message in the audio
system is displayed when attempting to exceed the limited volume.
• AdvanceTrac. The system cannot be turned off when Always-on has
been set.
MyKey 57
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display control to create a MyKey
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or, if the vehicle
is equipped with push button start, put the intelligent access key in
the backup slot; refer to Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information display controls and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK or the > button.
4. Press OK to select Create.
5. When prompted hold the OK button until you see a message
informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The key will be restricted
at the next start.
The key is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
To program optional settings for the key(s), refer to
Programming/Changing optional settings. If your vehicle is equipped
with remote start, refer to Using MyKey with remote start systems.
Programming/Changing Optional Settings
Note: All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in
which a key was programmed, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys. To clear all keys, refer to Clearing all MyKeys.
You can access the optional settings through the information display control.
1. Turn the ignition on using an admin key.
2. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to an optional feature.
4. Press OK or > to scroll through settings.
5. Press OK or > to make a selection.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
Note: All programmed MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle
in which a MyKey was created, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys.
To clear all MyKeys as admin keys, use the information display control to
do the following:
1. Access the main menu and select Settings, then MyKey .
2. Scroll to Clear All and press the OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
58 MyKey
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
The information display control displays information about keys
programmed to the vehicle:
• MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when a restricted key is used. If
mileage does not accumulate as expected, then the key is not being
used by the intended user. The only way to reset this to zero is by
resetting the keys. If the mileage is lower than the last time you
checked, then the key system has been recently reset.
• # MYKEY(S): Indicates how many restricted keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect deletion of a restricted key.
• # ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how many admin keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect if an additional key has
been programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is NOT compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a
non-Ford-approved remote start system. The actions provided below do
NOT make MyKey compatible with non-Ford-approved remote start
system, but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey functions.
Vehicles Equipped with Traditional Keys
When using a non-Ford-approved remote start system, the default
settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. This makes it NOT compatible with
MyKey. Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition
cylinder it may help you to retain some MyKey functions.
In addition to the key that they have already programmed as a MyKey,
owners of vehicles equipped with traditional keys may want to program
the non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey if the remote
start fob is used by the MyKey driver. To program a non-Ford-approved
remote start system as a MyKey, do the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a non-Ford approved remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-5 in the Creating a MyKey section.
MyKey 59
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access Key (Push Button Start)
Note: It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey
on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other
admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the system
will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have administrative
privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will identify the user
as an admin or MyKey driver depending on the settings of the actual key
used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system
status menus may include the non-Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Checking system status
section.
For all vehicles with a non-Ford-approved remote start installed, it is
possible to program all ’real’ keys as MyKeys, in which case, you will
need to use your remote start system to clear all MyKeys as admin keys
by doing the following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your non-Ford-approved remote start
fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-3 in the Clearing all MyKeys section.
60 MyKey
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot program a key • The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• The key in the ignition is the only admin key
(there always has to be at least one admin
key).
• The intelligent access key is not in the
backup slot (vehicles with push button start).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. Refer to Using MyKey with
remote start systems.
I cannot program the
optional settings
• The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No keys are programmed to the vehicle.
Refer to Creating a MyKey.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. Refer to Using MyKey with
remote start systems.
I cannot clear the
restricted keys
• Key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Creating a MyKey.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. Refer to Using MyKey with
remote start systems.
I lost the only admin
key
• Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost a key • Program spare keys as outlined under
SecuriLock in the Security chapter.
MyKey 61
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Condition Potential Causes
I accidentally
programmed all keys
as restricted keys
• The vehicle has a remote start system that is
recognized as an admin key. Refer to the
Using MyKey with remote start systems
section to reset all restricted keys using
remote start.
No restricted key
functions with
intelligent access key
(push button start)
• An admin key is present at engine start-up.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. Refer to Creating a MyKey
Restricted key
programmed total
includes one additional
key
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as a restricted key.
• The vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. Refer to Using MyKey with remote
start systems.
Admin keys
programmed total
includes one additional
key
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as an admin key.
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. Refer to Using MyKey with remote
start systems.
MyKey miles do not
accumulate
• The restricted key is not being used by the
intended user.
• The key system has been reset.
62 MyKey
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Remote Control
The remote control can be used any time the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
To disable or enable two-stage unlocking, press and hold both the lock
and unlock buttons on the remote control for four seconds . Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all
the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and
the turn signal will illuminate if all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
Note: If any door or the trunk is not closed, or if the hood is not closed
on vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
A
B
Locks 63
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Opening the Trunk
Press the button twice within three seconds to open the trunk.
Make sure the trunk is closed and latched before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched trunk may cause objects to fall out or block the driver’s rear
view.
Smart Locks
This feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if
your key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the power
door lock control, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door will
automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked, with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key or
using the lock button on the remote entry transmitter.
Autolock (If Equipped)
The autolock feature will automatically lock all vehicle doors when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is in the on position,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, (for manual
transmission, the parking brake should not be engaged) and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position
and the vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock (If Equipped)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
• the ignition is in the on position, all the doors are closed, and the
vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
• the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the
off or accessory position; and
• the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
turned to the off or accessory position.
64 Locks
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The doors will not autounlock if the vehicle has been electronically
locked before the driver door is opened.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
Note: The autolock and autounlock features can be activated or
deactivated independently of each other:
• through your authorized dealer, or
• by using the information display.
Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure
that the active anti-theft system is not armed, ignition is in the off
position, and all vehicle doors are closed.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and turn signal lamps illuminate when the integrated
keyhead transmitter is used to unlock the door(s).
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the on position, or
• the integrated keyhead transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
• When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the
ignition, the interior dome lamp and the turn signal lamps will
illuminate.
The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse, or
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery Saver
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the off position and a door is left open, and
in 30 minutes if the dome lamp control is left on and the ignition has
been turned to the off position. The battery saver will also shut off the
trunk lamps in 30 minutes if the trunk is left open.
Locks 65
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRUNK RELEASE
The remote trunk release button is
located on the center console.
Press the button to unlatch the
trunk.
Interior Trunk Control Lockout (Convertible Vehicles Only)
This feature helps prevent unauthorized access to the trunk when the
convertible top is open, by disabling the interior trunk control.
This is useful when you want to leave the convertible top open, but still
prevent access to the trunk.
To operate this feature (the vehicle must be off and accessory power
delay not active):
Lock the vehicle using the integrated keyhead transmitter or the power
door lock switch. The interior trunk control will now be disabled.
To enable the interior trunk control:
• use the integrated keyhead transmitter to unlock the vehicle,
• or turn the ignition on.
The interior trunk control will now work normally.
Manual Trunk Release
In the event of battery failure, you
can open the trunk on the
convertible by using your master
key in the key cylinder between the
seat cushion located in the back
seat on the driver’s side.
66 Locks
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and luggage compartment locked
and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child’s reach.
Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the trunk and risk
injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles.
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in the
trunk or vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or
animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release handle that provides a means of
escape for children and adults if they become locked inside the luggage
compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with the operation and location of
the release handle.
The handle is located inside the
luggage compartment either on the
luggage compartment door (lid) or
near the tail lamps. It is composed
of a material that will glow for hours
in darkness following brief exposure
to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the
luggage compartment door (lid) to
open from within the luggage
compartment.
Locks 67
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It is designed to help
prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to
your vehicle is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from
starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition off.
Anti-Theft Indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is in the off position, the indicator will
flash once every two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock威
system is functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the on position, the indicator will glow for
three seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock威 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position. If this
occurs, turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no
electronic interference with the programmed key. If the vehicle doesn’t
start, try to start it with the second programmed key and if successful
contact your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator
still flashes rapidly or glows steadily, the vehicle will not start, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
68 Security
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement of Integrated Keyhead Transmitters and Coded Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead
transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as both a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a
remote keyless entry transmitter. A maximum of eight coded keys can be
programmed to your vehicle; only four of these eight keys can be
integrated keyhead transmitters with remote entry functionality.
If your integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock威 coded
keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you will
need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences.
Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle. Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock威 coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program
both the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portion of
the remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock威 keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
Security 69
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six
seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key will start the vehicle’s engine and will operate the remote entry
system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter) if it has
been successfully programmed. The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, the theft indicator light may
flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key programmed
if you are still unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.
ANTI–THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The active anti-theft system is designed to warn you in the event of
unauthorized vehicle entry and is also designed to help prevent
unwanted towing of the vehicle.
You can choose what is monitored by arming the system in different
ways.
Partial Monitor Mode
To monitor the following:
• Doors
• Hood
• Trunk
Lock the vehicle using the key in the driver door key cylinder.
70 Security
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Full Monitor Mode
To monitor the following:
• Doors
• Hood
• Trunk
• Movement inside the vehicle (for convertible models, top must be fully
closed)
• Change in vehicle inclination (such as unwanted towing)
Lock the vehicle using the remote control or the power door lock control
with the accompanying door open and then close all doors.
Note: Do not choose full monitor mode if movement within the vehicle is
likely to occur or when the vehicle is in transport.
Note: For proper operation of the interior motion detection system,
ensure all windows are closed prior to arming the system. This will help
prevent accidental alarm activation due to external influences and ensure
proper interior motion detection. Additionally, the interior motion sensing
system will not arm if either door or the trunk is ajar.
If there is any potential perimeter anti-theft problem with your vehicle,
ensure all integrated keyhead transmitters are brought to the authorized
dealer to aid in troubleshooting.
Arming the System
When armed, the active anti-theft system is designed to notify you of an
unauthorized entry. When unauthorized entry or towing occurs, the
system will flash the turn signal lamps and interior lamps and will sound
the horn.
The system is ready to arm whenever the key is out of the ignition. Any
of the following actions will arm the alarm system:
• Press the lock button on the remote control.
• Lock all doors using the interior power lock switch while the driver or
passenger door is open and then becomes closed.
• Lock the driver door with the key in the key lock cylinder (this will
not, however, arm the interior motion or vehicle incline sensing
systems).
There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur
before the vehicle becomes armed.
Security 71
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Each door, the hood or the trunk is armed individually, and if any are
open, they must be closed for the system to enter the 20 second
countdown.
The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors, the hood and the
trunk are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the
20 second countdown. If any closure is not properly closed the turn
signal lamps will not flash and that closure will not be armed.
Disarming the System
You can disarm the system by any of the following actions:
• Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of
your integrated keyhead transmitter.
• Turn ignition to the on position with a valid programmed SecuriLock威
key or integrated keyhead transmitter.
• Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of
your integrated keyhead transmitter. This will only shut off the horn
and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding. The alarm system will still
be armed.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock the vehicle.
Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed
mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state.
Note: Unlocking the trunk inhibits the motion sensing system but the
system continues to monitor the doors, hood and vehicle incline. Once
the trunk becomes closed the motion sensing system will rearm.
Triggering the Anti-Theft System
The armed system will be triggered if:
• Any door, the hood or the trunk is opened without using the remote
entry transmitter portion of your integrated keyhead transmitter or
key in driver door cylinder.
• The ignition is turned to the on position with an invalid
unprogrammed SecuriLock威 key or integrated keyhead transmitter.
• The vehicle is towed or inclined.
• Motion is detected in the interior passenger compartment.
72 Security
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting In the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. Lock the steering column.
2
1
Steering Wheel 73
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Media
B. Volume down
C. Volume up
D. Seek up or next
E. Seek down or previous
Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio
modes.
Press the seek buttons to select the next or previous stored preset or
track. Press and hold to select the next or previous frequency or seek
through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
Refer to the SYNC威 or Navigation System chapter.
CRUISE CONTROL
Refer to the Cruise Control
chapter.
-
+
A
B
C
E
D
-
+
OK
A
B
-
+
SET
CNCL
RSM
ON
OFF
74 Steering Wheel
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
Type 1
Type 2
Refer to the Information Displays chapter.
OK
Steering Wheel 75
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield in icy conditions before turning on
the windshield wipers.
Rotate the end of the control away
from you to increase the speed of
the wipers. Rotate toward you to
decrease the speed of the wipers.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to activate
the washer.
• A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
O
F
F
OFF
76 Wipers and Washers
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Off
B. Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
C. Headlamps
High Beams
• Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate.
• Push the lever toward the
instrument panel again or pull the
lever towards you to deactivate.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
A
A B C
O
F
F
O
F
F
Lighting 77
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOLAMPS (If equipped)
WARNING: In severe weather conditions, it may be necessary to
switch your headlamps on manually.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps, it will have the
windshield wiper rainlamp feature. When the windshield wipers are
turned to low- or high-speed wiping during daylight, and the headlamp
control is in the autolamp position, the exterior lamps will turn on after a
brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off.
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The headlamps will remain on for a
period of time after you switch the
ignition off. You can adjust the time
delay using the display controls in
the instrument cluster. See the
Information Displays chapter.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
• Move the control up or down to
adjust the intensity of the panel
lighting.
• Move the control to the full
upright position, past detent, to
turn on the interior lamps.
• Move the control down, past
detent, to turn off the interior
lights.
Note: The panel dimmer control works only in nighttime illumination
mode. It has no effect in daytime illumination mode. Also, selectable
features such as gauge color and halo color will not be available in
daytime illumination mode.
Note:
If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the dimmer switch requires re-calibration. Rotate the dimmer
switch from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to reset. This
will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions.
A
78 Lighting
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
You can set the delay time to keep the headlamps on for up to three
minutes after the ignition is turned off.
Follow the steps below to change the delay time (Steps 1 through 6 must
be done within 10 seconds):
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position.
3. Turn the lighting control to the off position.
4. Turn the ignition on.
5. Turn the ignition off.
6. Turn the lighting control to the autolamp position. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn on.
7. Turn the lighting control to the off position when the desired delay
time has been reached. The headlamps and parking lamps will turn off.
You can set the headlamp exit delay to one of the following settings:
• Off
• 10 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 30 seconds
• 60 seconds
• 90 seconds
• 120 seconds
• 180 seconds
Note: You can also adjust the time delay using the display controls in the
instrument cluster. See the Information Displays chapter.
Lighting 79
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk
or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output (vehicles
equipped with halogen headlamps) or turns the front fog lamps on
(vehicles equipped with HID headlamps) in low light situations.
To switch the system on:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off, autolamp or parking lamp
position.
3. Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P.
4. Make sure the parking brake is disengaged.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The fog lamps can be turned on
when the lighting control is pulled
toward you and in the headlamps,
parking lamps or autolamps
positions.
The fog lamps will not operate when
the high beams are active.
A
80 Lighting
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DIRECTION INDICATORS
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
Note: An outage of any front turn signal lamp or the inner most of the
three-compartment rear turn signal lamps will result in a rapid flash rate.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome/Map lamps
The dome lamp lights when:.
• any door is opened.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
off.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up, past the
detent, until the courtesy lamps
come on.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lamp.
O
F
F
Lighting 81
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Press or lift the switches to operate
the windows.
• Press the switch to the first
detent and hold to open the
window.
• Lift the switch to the first detent
and hold to close the window.
One-Touch Up or Down (Front Windows)
This feature automatically opens or closes the window.
Press or lift the switch completely and release. The window will fully
open or close. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Restoring the One-Touch Up Functionality
Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibration with the door closed.
Calibrating with the door open will cause the window to continuously
bounce back.
Functionality may be lost under low battery power conditions.
To reset this function after restoring full battery power:
1. Pull the switch to the one-touch up position.
2. Hold the switch until the glass reaches the stall position and continue
to hold for two seconds.
3. Press the switch down and operate the window to the full down
position. One-touch up will now be functional.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
AUTO
AUTO
82 Windows and Mirrors
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if the switch is released
before the window is fully closed.
Short Drop Glass (Front Windows)
This feature lowers the glass when either door is opened to improve door
efforts and sealing. The glass returns to its closed position when the door
is closed.
Re-Calibrating a Window
Note: Perform short drop re-calibration with the doors closed.
Re-calibrating with doors open will cause the window to continuously
bounce back.
If a window will not raise again when the door is closed, use the switch
to fully raise the window, then hold the switch up for two seconds.
If a window will not lower when the door is opened:
1. Use the switch to fully lower the window, then hold the switch down
for two seconds.
2. Immediately after releasing the switch, pull the switch up to fully raise
the window and hold the switch up for two seconds.
Rear Power Windows (Convertible Only)
The rear quarter windows are operated by a single switch located at the
driver door window controls.
• Press the switch down and hold to open.
• Pull the switch up and hold to close.
Manual Override
The rear quarter window switch will not operate when:
• the convertible top is moving
• the convertible top is not completely up or down.
The rear quarter windows can be manually raised if the switch does not
operate when the convertible top is completely up or down.
The following procedure must be performed within two minutes:
1. Turn the ignition off, then turn back on.
2. Press the rear window switch down three times.
Windows and Mirrors 83
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Turn the ignition off, then turn back on.
4. Pull and hold the rear window switch up and hold for three seconds.
The rear windows will begin to start moving up.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you turn the
ignition off, or until either front door is opened.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left-hand mirror
B. Off
C. Right-hand mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist and fog when the rear
window defroster is activated.
Pony Projections Lights (If Equipped)
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up (or other types of contamination)
on the surface of the light lens can cause some non-permanent distortion
or reduced brightness of the image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
B
A
C
84 Windows and Mirrors
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The lights are located on the bottom of the mirror housings.
This feature will project an image onto the ground a short distance from
the vehicle whenever illuminated entry and exit is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
The approaching vehicle’s image is
small and near the inboard edge of
the main mirror when it is at a
distance. The image becomes larger
and begins to move outboard across
the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). Its image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches (B).
The vehicle will transition to your
peripheral field of view as it leaves
the blind spot mirror (C).
A
B
C
Windows and Mirrors 85
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night.
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
Slide-On-Rod
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Retract the visor before moving it
back toward the windshield and
storing it.
86 Windows and Mirrors
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to switch on the lamp.
Flexible Visor Storage System
The system can accommodate various storage accessories. A sunglasses
clip and multi-function clip are provided.
To attach one of the accessories, do
the following:
1. Insert the provided removal tool
(on the accessory holder) or a coin
into the slot on the plug and rotate
one-quarter turn in either direction
to remove. It may be necessary to
rotate the visor until the plug drops
away from the opening. Place the
plug in the provided holder when
not in use.
2. Remove the accessory from the holder and insert the end of the
storage accessory into the visor opening. Rotate one-quarter turn in
either direction until the accessory snaps into place. Make sure the open
end of the accessory is facing away from the windshield.
3. Reverse the procedure to remove the accessory and replace the cap or
change to a different accessory.
Additional accessories are available from your authorized dealer. See the
Accessories chapter for more information.
Windows and Mirrors 87
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SUNSHADE (IF EQUIPPED)
Use the sunshade to cover the glass roof inside your vehicle.
Use the center-mounted cup handle
to slide the shade open or closed.
88 Windows and Mirrors
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Type 1
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Speedometer
B. Fuel gauge
C. Engine coolant temperature gauge
D. Tachometer
E. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
Note: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white backlighting
when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on, you can select
one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge backlighting or create up
to three custom colors using the MyColor威 feature. Ambient color and
halo color are also selectable. See the Information Displays chapter for
more information. When certain gauges enter a warning state, they will
be backlit in red.
Fuel gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Instrument Cluster 89
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Type 2
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Speedometer
B. Information display. See the Information Displays chapter for more
information.
C. Tachometer
D. Fuel gauge
E. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Note: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white backlighting
when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on, you can select
one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge backlighting or create up
to three custom colors using the MyColor威 feature. Ambient color and
halo color are also selectable. See the Information Displays chapter for
more information. When certain gauges enter a warning state, they will
be backlit in red.
A B C
DE
90 Instrument Cluster
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
These indicators can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become
serious enough to cause expensive repairs. Many lights will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any light remains
on after starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light
for additional information.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac威/Traction control is active. If
the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac威/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Airbag readiness
If this light fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned on,
continues to flash or remains on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Instrument Cluster 91
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Anti-lock brake system
If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash, a
malfunction has been detected. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Normal braking is still functional unless the
brake warning light also is illuminated.
Anti-theft system
Flashes when the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system has
been activated.
Brake system warning light
To confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the on
position when the engine is not running, or in a position
between on and start, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition
is turned to the on position.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not
engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake
fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Charging system
Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
92 Instrument Cluster
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Door ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine oil pressure
Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range.
Engine coolant temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.
High beams
Illuminates when the high-beam headlamps are on.
Low fuel
Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty.
Low tire pressure warning
Illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the light remains
on at start up or while driving, the tire pressure should be
checked. When the ignition is first turned to on, the light will
illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does
not turn on or begins to flash, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Powertrain malfunction/reduced power
Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Instrument Cluster 93
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety belt
Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A Belt-Minder威 chime
will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt.
Service engine soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If
the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration
and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Speed control (if equipped)
The speed control system indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system is in:
• On (amber light): Illuminates when the speed control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off.
• Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the speed control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.
94 Instrument Cluster
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Turn signal
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Upshift (if equipped)
To maximize fuel economy, this light illuminates when the
manual transmission should be shifted to the next highest gear.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Sounds when the keyless vehicle is in RUN and the driver’s door is
opened (if equipped).
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Instrument Cluster 95
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls located on the on the steering wheel . Corresponding
information is displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls (Type 1)
• Press the info button to scroll
through trip, fuel usage and
MyKey威 information.
• Press the setup button to scroll
through various vehicle feature
settings.
• Press the reset button to choose
settings, reset information and
confirm messages.
Info
Press INFO repeatedly to cycle
through the following features:
TRIP A/B
Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and release INFO
until the A or B trip appears in the display (this represents the trip
mode). Press and hold RESET for two seconds to reset.
96 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MYKEY MILES (km)
For more information, refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
MILES (km) TO E
This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with
the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to
correctly detect the added fuel.
AVG MPG (L/100 km)
Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km.
MPG (L/km)
This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from ↓
poor economy to ↑ excellent economy.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
When your vehicle is not moving, this function shows ↓, one or no bars
illuminated. Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
TIMER
Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time.
To operate, do the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET until the timer resets.
Blank Screen
The display will be blank after cycling through all of the Info menu items.
System check and vehicle feature customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle through the following
features:
Note: Not all personalization items will appear unless your vehicle is so
equipped.
Information Displays 97
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK
When this message appears, press
the RESET button and the
information display will begin to
cycle through the following systems
and provide a status of the item if
needed.
1. XXX% OIL LIFE
2. CHARGING SYSTEM
3. DOORS STATUS
4. TRUNK STATUS
5. BRAKE SYSTEM
6. FUEL LEVEL
7. MYKEY DISTANCE (if MyKey威 is programmed)
8. MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
9. ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
Note: Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
OIL LIFE
This displays the remaining oil life.
An oil change is required whenever indicated by the information center
and according to the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change perform
the following:
1. Press and release SETUP to display “OIL LIFE XXX% HOLD RESET =
NEW”.
2. Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life
to 100%.
STEERING FEEL
This feature allows three modes of steering feel.
Press RESET to cycle through the settings of:
• STANDARD– Provides a balance between a comfort and sport feel.
• SPORT– Slightly higher effort required for steering with more road
force felt through the steering wheel. See note below.
98 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• COMFORT– Slightly less effort required for steering with less road
force felt through the steering wheel.
Note: When AdvanceTrac威 sport mode is on or when AdvanceTrac威 and
traction control are off, the steering feel will be locked in sport mode.
The display will show STEERING FEEL <SPORT> LOCKED and the
steering feel will not be selectable.
HALO LIGHT
Turns the halo lighting around the gauges on or off.
Press and hold RESET to turn the feature on or off.
AMBIENT LIGHT
Turns the ambient lighting on or off. Ambient lighting provides accent
lighting in various locations such as footwell areas, cup holders and the
center console bin. The parking lamps/headlamps must be on to use
ambient lighting.
Press and hold RESET to turn the feature on or off.
AMBIENT DIM
Use this to adjust the brightness of the ambient lighting.
Press RESET to choose the various settings.
GAUGE COLOR, AMBIENT COLOR, HALO COLOR
GAUGE COLOR: The instrument cluster gauges are backlit with white
backlighting when the headlamps are off. When the headlamps are on,
you can select one of the preset colors for the nighttime gauge
backlighting or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor威
feature.
Note: A gauge in a warning condition will be lit red when the headlamps
are on.
AMBIENT COLOR: You can select one of the preset colors for ambient
lighting or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor威 feature.
Information Displays 99
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HALO COLOR: You can select one of the preset colors for halo lighting
or create up to three custom colors using the MyColor威 feature.
Note: Headlamps or parking lamps must be on to set up colors.
To choose colors for the gauges, halo color or ambient lighting do the
following:
1. Press SETUP to reach the GAUGE COLOR, AMBIENT COLOR, or
HALO COLOR menu.
2. Press RESET to scroll through the following color options:
• ICE BLUE • BLUE
• WHITE • ORANGE
• GREEN • RED
• PURPLE • MYCOLOR 1, 2, 3 (See HOLD
RESET TO SET MY COLOR 1, 2,
3 following, to save personalized
color combinations)
HOLD RESET TO SET MYCOLOR 1, 2, 3 (Saving your own colors)
Apart from the preset colors, you can create your own color by adjusting
the levels of the three primary colors (red, green, and blue) through the
MyColor威 feature to achieve any of 125 different combinations. You can
save up to three custom colors in MyColor威.
To enter the MyColor威 adjust mode, do the following (vehicle must be
stationary):
1. Press and hold RESET for three seconds at the MyColor 1, 2 or 3
menu option to reach the MyColor威 adjust mode.
2. Press SETUP to scroll through the R (red), G (green), B (blue) and
Exit options.
3. Press RESET to blend in more of the color being adjusted.
4. To save and exit, hold RESET for three seconds when prompted.
Pressing RESET for less than three seconds will cycle back through the
colors.
UNITS
Displays the current units English or Metric.
Press RESET to change from English to Metric.
100 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOLAMP (SEC)
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
Press RESET to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0, 10, 20, 30,
60, 90, 120 or 180 seconds.
AUTOLOCK
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear and driven.
Press RESET to turn autolock on or off.
AUTOUNLOCK
This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver’s
door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off.
Press RESET to turn autounlock on or off.
REAR PARK AID
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
Press RESET to turn it off or on.
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP/ CLEAR MYKEY
For more information refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
LANGUAGE = ENGLISH / SPANISH / FRENCH
Allows you to choose which language for the information display.
Selectable languages are English, Spanish, or French.
Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles through each
of the language choices.
Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice.
Information messages
See Information messages later in this chapter for more information.
Information Displays 101
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information Display Controls (Type 2)
• Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
• Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to
exit a menu.
• Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting/messages.
Main menu
You can access the menus using the information display control.
• Gauge Mode
• Trip A/B
• Fuel Economy
• Track Apps (Track use only)
• Settings
• Information
102 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
†Gauge Mode
Gauges Detail Air/Fuel Ratio Virtual gauge shown
Vacuum inHG /
Boost psi
(Shelby威
GT500威)
Virtual gauge shown
Cyl Head Virtual gauge shown
Inlet Air Virtual gauge shown
Oil Press. No virtual gauge available
Oil Temp. Virtual gauge shown
Trans temp
(auto
transmission
only)
Virtual gauge shown
Voltage Virtual gauge shown
†See Virtual gauges later in this section for more information.
†Trip A/ B
Trip time
Trip distance
Fuel used
Avg mpg(L/100km)
Odometer (displays in lower line and may display in other menus)
†See Trip computer later in this section for more information.
Fuel Economy
Fuel Econ. Instant MPG (L/100km)
mi (km) to E
AVG MPG (L/100km)
Fuel Hist.: shows
fuel usage as a
bar graph based
on time. The
duration time can
be changed.
Duration: 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 30 Minutes, Last 5
Resets. The graph is updated each minute with the
fuel economy that was achieved during the prior 5,
10, 30 minutes of driving.
Information Displays 103
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
†Track Apps
Accelerometer
Acceleration timer
Brake Performance
Dashboard
Screen (Shelby威
GT500威)
Launch Control
(Shelby威
GT500威)
Off/On / RPM Setting
View/Clear Results
†See Track apps later in this section for more information.
Settings
Driver Assist Rear Park Aid On/Off
Vehicle Autolamp Delay Off or XXX seconds
Locks Autolock On/Off
Autounlock On/Off
Menu Control Standard: with standard set,
pressing the up/down arrows from
a lower level menu will escape to
the main menu.
Memory On: with memory on set,
pressing the up/down arrows will
navigate to the previous lower
level menu.
Oil Life Reset Set to XXX% (Hold OK to Reset).
Shiftpoint
(Shelby威
GT500威)
Shiftlamp On/Off
Shiftpoint 1500–7000 RPM
Shifttone On/Off
104 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Settings
Vehicle Dampers
(Shelby威
GT500威)
Sport / Normal
Steering Feel Standard
Sport Sport Locked:
This will display
when
AdvanceTrac威
sport mode is
on or when
AdvanceTrac威
and traction
control are off.
The steering
feel will be
locked in sport
mode and
steering feel
will not be
selectable.
Comfort
Information Displays 105
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Settings
†MyColor Gauge Color Ice Blue, White, Green, Purple,
Blue, Orange, Red, MyColor 1, 2,
3
Halo Halo Light On/Off
Halo Color Ice Blue, White,
Green, Purple,
Blue, Orange,
Red, MyColor 1,
2, 3
Ambient Light Ambient Light On/Off
Ambient Dim High/Low
Ambient Color Ice Blue, White,
Green, Purple,
Blue, Orange,
Red, MyColor 1,
2, 3
Set MyColor 1, 2,
3 (create your
own color by
adjusting the
levels (1–5) of
the three
primary colors –
red, green, and
blue.
Red
1–5
Green
Blue
MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to create MyKey
*The following only display if MyKey is programmed:
*AdvanceTrac Always On / Selectable
*MAX Speed 80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
*Speed Warning 45, 55 or 65 MPH (75, 90 or
105 km/h), Off
*Volume Limiter On/Off
*Clear MyKey Hold OK to Clear MyKey
*Language English, Español, Français
106 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Settings
Units English or Metric
System Reset Hold OK to Reset System to Factory Default
†The instrument cluster gauges are backlit white when the headlamps
are off. When the headlamps are on, you can select one of the preset
colors or MyColor 1, 2, 3 for the nighttime gauge backlighting. A gauge
in a warning condition will be backlit red when the headlamps are on.
*Track Application features and messages in the information display are
only available in English.
Information
MyKey Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a
programmed MyKey)
System Check Some items will only display during a system check
if a problem has been detected. If an issue exists on
one of the monitored systems, the number of
warnings that need immediate attention will display
in red and the number of informational warnings will
display in amber. Use the up/down arrow buttons to
scroll through the list; press the right arrow button
to display specific information on the highlighted
warning
TRIP COMPUTER (Trip A and B)
Resetting or pausing the trip computer
• Press OK to pause the Trip A or B screen/press again to un-pause.
• Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
Trip time
Registers the time of individual journeys.
Trip distance
Registers the mileage of individual journeys.
Fuel used
Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip.
Information Displays 107
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Average MPG (L/100km)
Shows the average distance traveled per unit of fuel used for a given trip.
Odometer
Registers the total mileage of the vehicle.
VIRTUAL GAUGES
Note: In order to provide real-time values, some gauges may display
more value fluctuation than others during normal operation.
Some gauges shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
AIR FUEL RATIO
Displays the current air to fuel mixture in the
engine.
VACUUM inHG / BOOST psi (Shelby姞 GT500姞)
See the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
CYLINDER HEAD TEMP (IF EQUIPPED)
Displays the engine’s cylinder head temperature.
108 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INLET AIR TEMP
Displays the temperature of the air in the cold air
inlet tube.
OIL TEMP
Displays the engine oil temperature. If the
temperature rises to the red area, stop in a safe place
and let the vehicle cool. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
TRANS TEMP (Automatic Transmission only)
Displays the transmission fluid operating temperature.
If the temperature rises to the red area, stop in a safe
place and let the transmission cool. If the problem
persists, see your authorized dealer.
VOLTS
Displays the vehicle’s battery voltage. If the voltage
is consistently too high or very low, see your
authorized dealer.
Information Displays 109
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TRACK APPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Track Apps is for track use only. Remember that
even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s
always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can
cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage.
Note: Track Apps are for track use only. They are not to be used under
any other driving conditions.
Note: Viewed or cleared results cannot be used unless the vehicle is at a
complete stop. The right arrow on the display menu will be inactive.
1/4 mile results may not be displayed if the vehicle does not reach
100 mph (160 kph) during the track run.
Accelerometer
Displays the vehicle rate of acceleration/deceleration.
• The red dot will move toward the area of acceleration/deceleration.
When accelerating/decelerating left, the red dot will move to the right
on the accelerometer. This is considered LEFT
acceleration/deceleration. When accelerating/decelerating right, the red
dot will move to the left on the accelerometer. This is considered
RIGHT acceleration/deceleration
• The rates of acceleration/deceleration are shown on the screen.
Acceleration timer
Displays the vehicle’s rate of acceleration.
1. Choose desired speed or distance.
2. Choose Automatic Start or Countdown Start.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
110 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Brake Performance
Displays the vehicle’s rate of deceleration.
1. Choose desired speed to start recording data.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
Dashboard Screen (Shelby姞 GT500姞)
For dashboard screen information, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
Launch Control (Shelby姞 GT500姞)
For launch control information, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the RESET button for Type 1 displays or the OK button for Type 2
displays to acknowledge and remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after a
short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access
the menus.
AdvanceTrac威 /
Traction Control
Messages
Action / Description
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威 system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
ADVANCETRAC
OFF
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威 system has
been disabled by the driver.
ADVANCETRAC ON
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威 system has
been enabled by the driver.
TRACTION
CONTROL OFF
Displayed when the traction control system
has been turned off.
Information Displays 111
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Alarm/Security
Messages
Action / Description
TO STOP ALARM
START VEHICLE
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is
armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver’s side door. In order to prevent
the perimeter alarm system from triggering,
the ignition must be turned to start or on
before the 12 second chime expires.
SECURITY EVENT
OCCURRED
Displayed when the active anit-theft system
was activated since the prior ignition cycle.
Battery and
Charging System
Messages
Action / Description
CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM
Displayed when the charging system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake System
Messages
Action / Description
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED
Displayed when the parking brake is set and
the vehicle is in motion.
Door Messages Action / Description
X DOOR AJAR
Displayed when the corresponding door is not
completely closed.
TRUNK AJAR
Displayed when the trunk is not completely
closed.
112 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel Messages Action / Description
CHECK FUEL FILL
INLET
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be
properly closed.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Key Messages Action / Description
COULD NOT
PROGRAM
INTEGRATED KEY
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a fifth integrated key. For more
information, refer to the Security chapter.
Maintenance
Messages
Action / Description
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
Displayed when the engine oil life is nearing
its end.
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
LOW
Displayed when the oil level is low. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place and check the oil level.
Refill if needed. If the oil level remains low or
becomes low again, see your authorized dealer.
SERVICE POWER
STEERING
The power steering system has detected a
condition that requires service. See your
authorized dealer.
SERVICE POWER
STEERING NOW
The power steering system has detected a
condition within the power steering system
that requires service immediately. See your
authorized dealer.
POWER STEERING
ASSIST FAULT
The power steering system has disabled power
steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
Information Displays 113
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey威 Messages Action / Description
MYKEY ACTIVE
DRIVE SAFELY
Displayed when MyKey威 is active.
ADVTRAC ON
MYKEY SETTING
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use when
trying to disable the AdvanceTrac威 system and
the optional setting is on.
VEHICLE SPEED
80 MPH MAX
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE NEAR
TOP SPEED
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
TOP SPEED MYKEY
SETTING
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
SPEED LIMITED TO
80 MPH
Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
on.
CHECK SPEED
DRIVE SAFELY
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds
a preselected speed.
BUCKLE UP TO
UNMUTE AUDIO
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and
Belt-Minder威 is activated.
MYKEY COULD NOT
PROGRAM
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.
Park Aid Messages Action / Description
CHECK REAR PARK
AID
Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) and the park aid is disabled.
114 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Messages Action / Description
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Track Key Messages Action / Description
TRACKEY ACTIVE
TRACK USE ONLY
Displayed when a trackey is in use. Refer to
the Boss威 302 supplement for more
information.
TRACKEY IDLE
ENABLED
Displayed when a trackey is in use. Refer to
the Boss威 302 supplement for more
information.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS
The compass heading is displayed in the center integrated display (CID).
Note: The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration adjustment.
Information Displays 115
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Compass Zone Adjustment
When something affects the compass readings, typically the compass
corrects itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary.
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Turn ignition to the on position.
3. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio
preset buttons together for
approximately five seconds until
ZONE XX appears in the CID.
4. Press and release the 7 and 9
radio preset buttons together,
repeatedly until ZONE XX
changes to the correct zone
(1–15) in the CID.
5. The direction displays after the buttons are released. The zone is now
updated.
Compass Calibration Adjustment
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and becomes noticeable as the vehicle
crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates this error.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all the
vehicle’s doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together for
approximately 10 seconds until CAL appears. Release the buttons.
3. Drive the vehicle in a circle slowly (under than 3 mph [5 km/h]); it
may take up to five circles to complete calibration.
4. When the CAL display changes to the direction value (N, S, E, W,
etc.), the compass is calibrated.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
116 Information Displays
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance/Strength The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result the audio
system muting.
CD/CD Player Information
Note: CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in
(12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function
correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Note:
CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only, wiping from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
Audio System 117
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files are played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in
the current folder.
118 Audio System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AM/FM SINGLE CD/MP3 SATELLITE-COMPATIBLE SOUND SYSTEM
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features such as SIRIUS satellite radio may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
OK
TUNE
LOAD
VOL
CD
AUX
AM/FM
SIRIUS
•DIRECT
TEXT
SCAN
CAT/FOLD
CLOCK #
SOUND
MENU
SEEK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
PHONE
Audio System 119
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
A. Memory presets Store your favorite stations for later access.
When tuned to any station, press and hold a
preset button until sound returns and
PRESET # SAVED appears in the display.
Save presets automatically by using the
autoset feature. Press MENU repeatedly until
AUTO PRESET ON/OFF appears in the
display. Use the SEEK buttons to turn AUTO
PRESET to ON, and either wait five seconds
for the search to initiate or press OK to
immediately start the search. If you press
another control within those five seconds, the
search does not start. The 10 strongest
stations will be filled and the station stored in
preset 1 begins playing. If there are fewer
than 10 strong stations, the system stores the
last one in the remaining presets.
Note: Autoset does not delete your original
preset stations.
Note: In order to re-run the autoset features,
you must first turn it off before turning it
back on.
B. MENU Access different audio features:
Compression can be turned on or off. When
compression is on, the soft and loud CD
passages are brought together for a more
consistent listening level.
Shuffle can be turned on or off. Turning
shuffle on plays the current CD tracks in
random order.
RDS Radio allows you to search
RDS-equipped stations for a certain category
of music format: CLASSIC, COUNTRY,
JAZZ/RB, ROCK, etc.
In SIRIUS mode, access different satellite
radio options and follow the prompts.
C. CLOCK Set the time. Use the memory presets buttons
to enter the time, then press OK.
120 Audio System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
D. PHONE Access the phone features of the SYNC威
system. Refer to the SYNC威 chapter for more
information.
If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC威,
the display will read NO PHONE.
E. SOUND Allows you to adjust the sound settings using
the SEEK buttons:
Bass levels can be increased or decreased.
Can also be adjusted by turning the TUNE
control.
Treble levels can be increased or decreased.
Can also be adjusted by turning the TUNE
control.
Balance adjust the sound between left and
right speakers. Can also be adjusted by
turning the TUNE control.
Fade adjust the sound between the front and
back speakers. Can also be adjusted by
turning the TUNE control.
Speed Compensated Volume adjusts the
volume to compensate for speed and wind
noise. You can set the system between off and
+7.
All Seat Mode/Driver Seat Mode/Top
Down Mode (if equipped) optimizes sound
quality for the chosen seating position.
DSP Mode (if equipped) allows you to
choose between STEREO SURROUND mode
and STEREO mode.
F. Eject Eject the CD.
G. CD slot Insert a CD.
Audio System 121
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
H.
TUNE/OK/Play/Pause
In radio mode, TUNE allows you to scan the
frequency band in individual increments.
In SIRIUS mode, TUNE allows you to find
the next or previous available SIRIUS威
satellite station.
OK allows you to confirm commands with
special phone and media features. If your
vehicle is equipped with SYNC, refer to the
SYNC chapter for more information.
Play/Pause allows you to play or pause a
track when listening to a CD.
I. AUX Access Line In (auxiliary audio mode) and
SYNC威. If your vehicle is equipped with
SYNC, refer to the SYNC chapter for more
information.
J. CD Press the CD button to access CD/MP3 mode.
The CD/MP3 begin to play where it left off. If
no CD is loaded, NO DISC appears in the
display.
Press the seek buttons to access the previous
or next track. Press and hold the seek buttons
to quickly reverse or advance within the same
track.
K. SIRIUS Access SIRIUS satellite radio mode. Press
repeatedly to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 and
SAT3.
Note: SIRIUS威 satellite radio is available only
with a valid SIRIUS威 radio subscription. Check
with your authorized dealer for availability.
L. AM/FM Select AM, FM1 or FM2.
M. On/Off/VOL Press the power control to turn the system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
N. LOAD This control is not operational. To load a CD,
insert the disc, label side up, into the CD slot.
122 Audio System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
O. CAT/FOLD In SIRIUS mode, switch between turning the
most recently selected satellite radio category
on or off.
In MP3 mode, use the SEEK buttons to
access the previous or next folder.
P. SCAN In radio mode, hear a brief sampling of all
radio stations.
In SIRIUS mode, hear a brief sampling of all
available channels. If a specific category is
selected, press SCAN for a brief sampling of
all available channels within the selected
category.
In CD/MP3 mode, hear a brief sampling of
all tracks on the current disc or MP3 folder.
Q. DIRECT In radio mode, select the desired radio
frequency (i.e. 93.9) using the memory preset
numbers (0–9).
In SIRIUS mode, enter the desired channel
(i.e. 002) using the memory preset buttons. If
you only enter one digit, press OK and the
system goes to that channel. If you enter
three digits, the system automatically goes to
that channel, if available. You may cancel your
entry by pressing DIRECT. If an invalid station
number is entered, INVALID CHANNEL
appears in the display and the system
continues playing the current station.
In CD mode, enter the desired track number
using the memory preset buttons (0–9). The
system then begins playing that track.
In MP3 mode, enter a memory preset button
of the desired folder. The system advances to
that specific folder.
Audio System 123
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
R. TEXT In MP3 mode, allows you to view Album
(AL), Folder (FL), Song (SO) and Artist (AR)
in the display, if available.
Note: In text mode, sometimes the display
requires additional text to be displayed. When
the</>indicatorison,pressTEXT and
then use the SEEK buttons to view the
additional display text.
S. SEEK In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press one of the seek buttons. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In SIRIUS mode, select the previous or next
channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use the SEEK
buttons find to the previous or next channel
in the selected category.
In CD/MP3 mode, select the previous or
next track.
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while the vehicle is
moving.
124 Audio System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
The auxiliary input jack (AIJ)
allows you to connect and play
music from your portable music
player through the vehicle speakers.
You can use any portable music
player designed for use with
headphones. Your audio extension
cable must have male 1/8 in.
(3.5 mm) connectors at each end.
1. Make sure the vehicle, radio and portable music player are turned off
and the vehicle is in P (Park).
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the AIJ.
3. Turn on the radio. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn on your portable music player and adjust its volume to 1/2.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You should
hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
Audio System 125
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks and charge devices (if
supported). Refer to the SYNC威
chapter for more information.
LINE IN
126 Audio System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
SIRIUS威 broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of SIRIUS威 satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.siriuscanada.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
Audio System 127
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS威
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle. Refer to your authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS威
satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time.
128 Audio System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting
SIRIUS威 troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Acquiring Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS威
system failure
Internal module or system
failure present.
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a fault.
See your authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel Channel no longer
available.
Tune to another channel
or choose another preset.
Unsubscribed
Channel
Subscription not available
for this channel.
Contact SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the channel,
or tune to another
channel.
No Signal Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS威 satellite or
SIRIUS威 tower to the
vehicle antenna.
The signal is currently
being blocked. When you
move into an open area,
the signal should return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has been
deactivated by SIRIUS威
Satellite Radio.
Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
reactivate or resolve
subscription issues.
No Channels
Available
All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
Using the channel guide,
unlock or unskip the
channels.
Subscription
Updated
SIRIUS威 has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
No action required.
Audio System 129
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
A. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
de-mister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated rear window on and off. Refer to
Heated rear window later in this chapter for more information.
C. Air distribution control: You can set the air distribution control to
any position between the symbols.
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, de-mister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and de-mister vents.
Distributes air through the floor vents.
A B C D E
I
K
J
F
G
H
R
MAX
A/C
A/C
130 Climate Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
D. A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. Air
conditioning cools the vehicle using outside air. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly
open for two to three minutes.
E. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
F. MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents to cool the vehicle. This position is more economical and efficient
than normal A/C.
G. Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Turns the passenger
heated seat on and off. Refer to Heated seats in the Seats chapter for
more information.
H. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated
in your vehicle. Turn to select the desired temperature.
I. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in your
vehicle. Turn to select the desired fan speed or switch off. If you switch
the fan off, the windshield may fog up.
J. Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Turns the driver heated
seat on and off. Refer to Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
K. Power: Press the button to turn the system on and off. When the
system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
Climate Control 131
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)
Note: To use the touchscreen controls, refer to the Touchscreen climate
controls in the Navigation System chapter.
A. CLIMATE: Control the system through the touchscreen display. See
Touchscreen functions later in this section.
B. Rear defrost: Turns the heated rear window on and off. Refer to
Heated rear window later in this chapter for more information. If your
vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this button turns them on also.
C. A/C: Press the button to turn air conditioning on or off. Air
conditioning cools the vehicle using outside air. To improve air
conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly
open for two to three minutes.
Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: A/C turns on automatically in MAX A/C, Defrost and Floor/Defrost.
D. Passenger temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the
air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
E. Passenger heated seat control (if equipped): Turn the passenger
heated seat on and off. Refer to Heated seats in the Seats chapter for
more information.
E
J
L
K
B
C
D
A
I G FH
132 Climate Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
F. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When the LED on the button is lit, the air currently in
the passenger compartment is being recirculated. Using recirculated air
can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A/C is selected
or can be turned on manually in any airflow mode except Defrost.
G. Fan speed control: Press + or - to increase or decrease the volume
of air circulated in your vehicle.
H. AUTO: Press the button to turn on fully automatic operation. Select
the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system
automatically determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and
outside or recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the
selected temperature.
I. Driver temperature control: Press to increase or decrease the air
temperature on the driver side of the vehicle.
This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone
operation is disengaged.
J. Driver heated seat control (if equipped): Turn the driver heated
seat on and off. Refer to Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
K. Power: Press to turn the climate control system on and off. When the
system is off, outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
The system status in the touchscreen is also turned off. When the power
is turned back on, the system defaults to fully automatic control.
L. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
de-mister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Climate Control 133
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and/or fan speed can also be increased to
improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position (vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission) to continue to receive cool air
from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in AUTO mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance in panel or panel/floor modes:
1. Move temperature control to the coolest setting.
2. Select A/C and recirculated air to provide colder airflow.
3.
Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust to maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.
134 Climate Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather, select
Defrost. Temperature and/or fan speed can also be increased to
improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2-3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out.
• A small amount of air may be felt from the floor vent regardless of the
air distribution setting that is selected.
During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for
extended periods of time in gear, it is recommended to run the A/C in
the MAX A/C mode, adjust the blower fan speed to the lowest setting
and put the vehicle’s transmission into the P (Park) position (vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission) to continue to receive cool air
from your A/C system.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in AUTO mode, press MAX A/C.
For maximum cooling performance MAX A/C in manual override control
1. Choose Panel, A/C, and recirc controls.
2. Set the temperature to LO.
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Climate Control 135
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEATED REAR WINDOW
Note: The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the
control again within 15 minutes to switch it off. It turns off automatically
after 15 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Note: A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign
objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in
place could result in degradation or damage to the system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which is located just in
front of the windshield under the cowl grille on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
The particulate air filtration system is designed to reduce the
concentration of airborne particles such as dust, spores and pollen in the
air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle. The particulate filtration
system gives the following benefits to customers:
• Improves the customer’s driving comfort by reducing particle
concentration
• Improves the interior compartment cleanliness
• Protects the climate control components from particle deposits
For more information regarding the interval at which you should replace
the cabin air filter, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance chapter.
For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an
authorized dealer.
136 Climate Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system,
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a collision.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the
base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than 30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 mm) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
Seats 137
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in
and/or operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its
proper position. The driver should never adjust the head restraint while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Front seat head restraints
(if equipped)
The head restraints consist of:
A. An energy absorbing head
restraint
B. Two steel stems
C. Guide sleeve adjust/release button
D. Guide sleeve unlock/remove
button
Note: Before adjusting any head restraint, adjust the seatback to an
upright driving/riding position. Properly adjust the head restraint so that
the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and
positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants
of extremely tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
To adjust the head restraint, do the following:
• Raise: pull up on the head restraint (A).
• Lower: press and hold the guide sleeve adjust/release button (C) and
push down on the head restraint (A).
A
B
D
C
138 Seats
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Remove: Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest
adjustment position and then press and hold both the adjust/release
button (C) and the unlock/remove button (D), then pull up on the
head restraint.
• Reinstall: Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the
head restraint down until it locks.
Front seat non-adjustable head restraints (if equipped)
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of a trimmed foam covering
over the upper structure of the
seatback.
Properly adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding position, so that
the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your
head.
Rear seat non-adjustable outboard head restraints
The second row outboard non-adjustable head restraints can be rotated
forward to improve rear vision when there are no rear occupants.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
A. a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure,
B. and a rotation button.
Press the rotation button to rotate the head restraint forward in order to
improve rear vision when there are no rear seat occupants.
Properly adjust the head restraint to an upright driving/riding position by
lifting up on the head restraint until it locks into its original position.
A
B
Seats 139
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tilting Head Restraints (if equipped)
The front head restraints may have a tilting feature for extra comfort. To
tilt the head restraint, do the following:
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving/riding
position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head
to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver’s seat or seatback while the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Rock the seat backwards and forwards after
releasing the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
Moving the seats backward and
forward
140 Seats
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recline adjustment
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
Adjusting the height of the
driver’s seat
Seats 141
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback.
The power seat control is located on
the outboard side of the seat. Move
the switch in the direction of the
arrows to raise or lower the seat
cushion or to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Power lumbar (if equipped)
The power lumbar control is located on the top of the driver’s seat side
shield.
• Press one side of the control to increase lower back firmness.
• Press the other side of the control to decrease lower back firmness.
142 Seats
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
The heated seats will only function when the ignition is in the on
position.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seat control is located in the lower center of the instrument
panel.
To operate the heated seats:
• Press control to activate.
• Press again to deactivate.
Seats 143
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR SEATS
Rear seat entry/exit
Use the seatback release to fold the
back of the front seat forward for
rear seat access. This release handle
is located on the upper back of the
front seat. The seatback locks
automatically when returned to the
normal position.
Use the recliner handle to return
the seatback to the desired position.
2nd row seat/split-folding rear seat (if equipped)
One or both rear seatbacks (coupe only) can be folded down to provide
additional cargo space.
To lower the seatback(s) from
inside the vehicle, be sure the head
restraint is in the upright position,
pull the strap to release the
seatback and then fold the seatback
down.
144 Seats
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When raising the seatback(s), make sure you hear the seat latch into
place. Pull down on the seatback to ensure that it has latched.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat may
become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
Rear seat delete (if equipped)
WARNING: In a collision, passengers who are unbelted are
significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
This is not a seating position.
Persons or child seats cannot be
placed in the rear of vehicles with
the rear seat delete option.
Seats 145
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CAR2U姞 HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use
in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
Note: Programming the system to a community gate will require a
unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model. Contact
the help line on 1-866-572-2728 for further information.
Note: If you accidently enter the program mode by pressing and
releasing the outer two buttons or all three buttons simultaneously, do
not press any button until the module times out after a few seconds and
resets to normal mode. When the module has timed out, all three LED
lamps will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
146 Universal Garage Door Opener
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate security devices and home lighting systems.
Additional system information can be found on-line at www.learcar2U.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-866-572-2728.
Rolling code programming
Note: If you do not follow the time-sensitive instructions, the device will
time out and you will have to repeat the complete procedure.
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the outer two
buttons for 1–2 seconds, then
release.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
Note: If you cannot locate the learn
button, refer to the Owner Manual
of your garage door opener or call
the toll-free help line on
1-866-572-2728.
3. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 10–30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
4. Return to your car.
5. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door. You may
need to hold the button from
5–20 seconds, during which time the selected button LED lamp will flash
slowly.
6. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
The LED lamp will flash rapidly until programming is complete.
Universal Garage Door Opener 147
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
7. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device, repeat steps one through six
substituting a different function button in step four.
Fixed code programming
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
To program units with fixed code
DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter,
paper and a pen or pencil.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Open the battery cover and note all the switch settings from left to
right.
When the switch is in the up, on, or + position, mark down “left button”.
When the switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, mark down
“middle button”.
When the switch is in the down, off, or – position, mark down “right
button”.
3. Press all three function buttons
simultaneously for a few seconds
and then release. The LED lamps
will flash slowly.
Note: The following step must be
completed within 2.5 minutes.
4. Enter the corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into the
system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the
settings you noted.
148 Universal Garage Door Opener
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Simultaneously press and release all three function buttons. The LED
lamps will illuminate.
6. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door.
Note: You may need to hold the
button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage
door.
7. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
When the button is released, the LED lamp will flash slowly.
8. The LED lamp will begin to flash rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door does not operate, repeat the previous
steps. Otherwise, call the toll-free help line on 1-866-572-2728.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the function button codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
LED lamps above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the LED lamps flash, release the buttons. The codes for all
buttons are erased.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Universal Garage Door Opener 149
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
• on the instrument panel
• in the center console storage compartment.
150 Auxiliary Power Points
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of console features.
• Cupholders in the front of the console (pull the door open to access).
Remove the spacer from the cupholder to hold deeper cups.
• Lockable storage bin (use the ignition key to lock/unlock the console
bin and press the latch to open the console)
• Auxiliary power point
• Coin holder slots
• Audio input jack
• USB port (if equipped)
Storage Compartments 151
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 km) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
This system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting your engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
152 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IGNITION SWITCH
A. Off – the ignition is off. Note: In
order to switch off the engine while
the vehicle is in motion, shift to
neutral and use the brakes to bring
the vehicle to a safe stop. After the
vehicle has stopped, shift into park
and turn the engine off. Then, turn
the key to the accessory or off
position.
B. Accessory – allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not running.
C. On – all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
D. Start – cranks the engine. The engine may continue cranking for up to
10 seconds or until the vehicle starts. Release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
• Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission, make sure the
gearshift is in P (Park) and the parking brake is set.
• If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission, make sure the parking
brake is set, then push the clutch pedal to the floor.
• Turn the key to on without turning the key to start.
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully press the brake pedal.
C
D
B
A
Starting and Stopping the Engine 153
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Turn the key to start the engine. The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, wait for a short period
of time and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13
o
F (-25
o
C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this flooded engine procedure.
1. Select park or neutral.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Fully press the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
154 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C
electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be able to be used outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure the vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It will achieve maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. If you use the heater longer
than three hours, this will not improve system performance and will use
unnecessary electricity.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 155
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel
system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not
be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
156 Fuel and Refueling
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum
of 15% ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel, fuel methanol,
leaded fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the
emission control system. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Octane Recommendations
• 3.7L V6 engine
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an
octane rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with
octane levels below 87 are not recommended.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
Fuel and Refueling 157
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• 5.0L V8 engine
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some stations offer fuels posted as “Regular” with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels
below 87 are not recommended. Premium fuel will provide improved
performance and is recommended for severe duty usage such as trailer tow.
• For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500
Supplement
• For Boss威 302 octane requirements. see the Boss威 302 Supplement
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane
rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal. With keyless ignition, just start the engine. Crank time
will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, refer to Warning lamps and
indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Refilling with a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or
aftermarket funnels into the capless fuel system. This could damage
the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the ground
instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
158 Fuel and Refueling
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with the
capless fuel system and can damage it. The included funnel has been
specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. Locate the white plastic funnel in the spare tire
compartment.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the capless fuel
system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of
the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places;
•
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
• Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
•
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel and Refueling 159
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Easy Fuel姞 “No cap” Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel filler door by pressing the center of the door about one
inch from the door’s rear edge.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping.
4. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank. Do
not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel
filler nozzle. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located within
the fuel filler housing and to the ground.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the information display.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to close
properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing
to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to
turn on as well.
160 Fuel and Refueling
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,200 km–4,800
km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
Fuel and Refueling 161
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
162 Fuel and Refueling
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted
to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the
Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your authorized
dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel威
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
Fuel and Refueling 163
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
164 Fuel and Refueling
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the
gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel
usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down, the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as
a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents
the front wheels from turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with overdrive
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six. The automatic transmission shift
strategy has the ability to detect hilly terrain or mountainous areas and
will provide a limited amount of grade assist features automatically.
P
Transmission 165
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
S (Sport)
Moving the gearshift lever to S (Sport):
•
Provides additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This will increase engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs (vehicle
acceleration, accelerator pedal, brake pedal and vehicle speed).
• Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
Note: The system will stay in S (Sport) until the gear shift lever is
moved into another gear for example P (park) or D (Drive).
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
Your SelectShift automatic transmission gives you the ability to manually
change gears if you’d like. To use SelectShift, move the gearshift lever
into S (Sport). Now you can use the thumb toggle on the side of your
gearshift lever to select gears.
• Press (+) on the gearshift lever
to manually upshift the
transmission.
• Press (–) on the gearshift lever to
manually downshift the
transmission.
The information display in the instrument cluster will show the current
selected gear you are in.
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, SelectShift will automatically make some downshifts
even if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.
Although the SelectShift will make some downshifts for you, it will still
allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines
that the engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held
without shifting.
166 Transmission
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Some models have a “blink” feature (if equipped). If manually
selecting a gear that is out of the current vehicle speed range the vehicle
will not make the requested shift and will ”blink” the current gear.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is
used.
Use the BSI lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position in
the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead
battery.
Note: For some markets this feature will be disabled.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition off before performing this
procedure.
1. Remove the cup holder insert.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), remove the protective cover
to the interlock release access hole
on the console.
Transmission 167
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Insert the screwdriver (or similar
tool) into the access hole and press
while pulling the gearshift lever out of
the P (Park) position and into the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Remove the tool and reinstall the
protective cover.
5. Start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the Clutch
Manual transmission vehicles have a starter interlock that prevents
cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully pressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the
floor, then put the gearshift lever in
the neutral position.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal and move
the gearshift lever to the desired
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
5. Release the parking brake, then
slowly release the clutch pedal while
slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the floor.
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with
the full extension of the clutch pedal.
168 Transmission
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Failure to fully press the clutch pedal to the floor may cause
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or
damage the transmission.
Note: Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill.
These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
Recommended Shift Speeds
Note: Do not downshift into 1 (First) when your vehicle is moving faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h). This may damage the clutch and/or
transmission.
Upshift according to the following charts.
For the 3.7L V6 with 2.73 axle ratio, shift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 - 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 - 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 - 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 - 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
For the 3.7L V6 with 3.31 axle ratio, shift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2 13 mph (21 km/h)
2 - 3 26 mph (42 km/h)
3 - 4 37 mph (59 km/h)
4 - 5 43 mph (69 km/h)
5 - 6 59 mph (95 km/h)
Transmission 169
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For the 5.0L V8, shift according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating
(recommended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
1 - 2 17 mph (27 km/h)
2 - 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 - 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 - 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 - 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
Reverse
Note: The gearshift lever can only be moved to R (Reverse) by pushing
the knob down before shifting to reverse. This is a lockout feature which
protects the transmission from accidentally engaging R (Reverse) when
intending to select 1 (First).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into
R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor to disengage clutch.
3. Shift into R (Reverse) by pushing
the gearshift knob down, then
moving the lever fully to the left,
then forward.
Note: Do not press down on the shifter during any operation other than
shifting to R (Reverse), as you may be inhibited from selecting your
desired gear.
If R (Reverse) is not fully engaged, press the clutch pedal down and
return the gearshift to the neutral position. Release the clutch pedal for a
moment, then press it down and shift to R (Reverse) again.
170 Transmission
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Parking Your Vehicle
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the
parking brake fully.
To park your vehicle:
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, hold the clutch pedal down, then shift
into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
AXLE INFORMATION
Traction-Lok™ Axle (If Equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok™ axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
Traction-Lok™ rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
Axle with TORSEN姞 Differential (If Equipped)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the axle
equipped with a TORSEN威 differential functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
rear axle equipped with a TORSEN威 differential could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not
affect normal driving and should not be noticeable to the driver.
HILL START ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into P (Park) for automatic
transmission or 1st gear for manual transmissions.
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.
Transmission 171
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling
the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active,
the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
This feature makes it easier to pull away when the vehicle is on a slope
without the need to use the parking brake. When this feature is active,
the vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds
after you release the brake pedal. This allows you time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The brakes are released
automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent
the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when
pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights
or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
This feature is activated automatically on any slope that can result in
significant vehicle rollback. This feature will not operate if the parking
brake is activated.
Using Hill Start Assist
Note: If the engine is revved excessively, hill start assist will be
deactivated.
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.
172 Transmission
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. Refer to the Vehicle Care chapter for
wheel cleaning instructions.
Refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to P
(Park) and apply the parking brake, and then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The ABS lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start up,
remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need
to be serviced.
If the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released,
have your brake system serviced immediately.
Brakes 173
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the dangers inherent when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
To set the parking brake, pull the parking brake handle up as far as
possible.
To release the parking brake, press and hold the button located at the
end of the parking brake handle. Pull the handle up slightly, then push
the handle down.
174 Brakes
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or mud), turning the
traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to
spin with full engine power. Turn off the traction control system
by pressing the stability control button located on the center
console.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the
AdvanceTrac威 system, the stability control light and the stability
control off light will illuminate steadily. Verify that the traction control
system was not manually disabled through using the information display
control. If the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your
vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 disabled could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the system is in sport mode, the
traction control system is turned off, or AdvanceTrac威 is turned
off.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing system status.
OFF
Traction Control 175
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and/or wheel/tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac威 sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
176 Stability Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The AdvanceTrac威 system helps you keep control of your vehicle when
on a slippery surface. The electronic stability control (ESC) portion of
the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides and the traction control
system (TCS) helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. (For
details on TCS operation, see the Traction Control chapter.)
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac威
skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac威
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
Stability Control 177
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING ADVANCETRAC姞
The system automatically is enabled when you start your engine. The
ESC portion of the system is disabled when the transmission is in R
(Reverse) or, on some models, if the stability control button is pressed
and held for more than five seconds when the brakes are applied and the
vehicle is at a stop. The traction control portion of the system can be
turned off independently. See the Traction Control chapter.
AdvanceTrac威 Features
Button
functions
Mode
icon
status
ESC TCS
Default at
start-up
—
On during
bulb
check
Enabled Enabled
Button pressed
momentarily
Traction
control off
On Enabled Disabled
Button pressed
twice; brakes
applied
Sport mode (if
equipped)
On Enabled Enabled
Button pressed
and held more
than 5 seconds;
brakes applied;
no throttle
AdvanceTrac威
Disabled
On Disabled Disabled
Button pressed
again after
deactivation
AdvanceTrac威
fully enabled
Off Enabled Enabled
Some models may also come equipped with a sport mode which allows
the driver to reduce normal AdvanceTrac威 system intervention and
provide a more spirited driving experience. To enter sport mode, press
the stability control button twice rapidly with the brakes applied. The
message appears in the information display that the system is now in
sport mode.
Note: Sport mode is not intended to be used on public roadways.
178 Stability Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note:
Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s
accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
The system can be turned off using the information display control. Refer
to the Information Display chapter. If a fault is present in the system, a
warning message appears in the information display and does not allow
the driver to switch the faulted system on.
Parking Aids 179
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or
receding object is detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R (Reverse):
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper
or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
A
180 Parking Aids
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the trunk is ajar. If the trunk is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the trunk is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the trunk.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses fixed
guidelines which show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking
space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the vehicle.
Note: Do not use the camera system if the trunk is ajar.
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Parking Aids 181
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating.
• The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Guidelines
Note: The guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to
your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects are
getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the
yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Rear Camera Delay
On vehicles without a navigation system, the camera image in the
rear view mirror remains on for a few seconds to assist in parking or
attaching a trailer.
On vehicles with a navigation system, the camera image remains in
the display until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs
when the rear camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is
selected. Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default
setting for the rear camera delay is OFF.
D
C
B
A
182 Parking Aids
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if the vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The speed controls are located on
the steering wheel.
Switching On Cruise Control
Press and release ON.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET +.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the instrument cluster.
-
+
SET
CNCL
RSM
ON
OFF
Cruise Control 183
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and hold SET + or SET –. Release the control when you reach
the desired speed.
• Press and release SET + or SET –. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the desired speed.
Press and release SET +.
Canceling a Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. The set speed will not be erased.
Resuming a Set Speed
Press and release RSM.
Switching Off Cruise Control
Note: The set speed is erased when you turn off cruise control.
Press and release OFF or turn off the ignition.
184 Cruise Control
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation. When a system error is detected the following message
Service Power Steering, Service Power Steering Now or Power Steering
Assist Fault may appear in the information display.
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostics
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation of the electronic system. When an electronic error is
detected, Power Steering Assist Fault will be displayed in the
information display. If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
turn off the engine. After at least 10 seconds, reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the information display for Power
Steering Assist Fault. If the message returns, or returns while driving,
take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the message
displayed, the steering assist is turned off, making the vehicle harder to
steer.
WARNING: If Service Power Steering is displayed in the
information display, a problem with the system function has been
detected. On the next key cycle Service Power Steering Now will be
displayed and steering assist will be removed until the steering system
is serviced. Have your vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING: Obtain immediate service if a system error is
detected. You may not notice any difference in the feel of your
steering, but a serious condition may exist. Failure to do so may result
in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power-assisted steering system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
Driving Aids 185
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause
permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the
system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.
When a steering system error is detected, steering messages may appear
in the information display.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
Selectable steering
Note: The steering setting defaults to standard if the battery is
disconnected or removed.
Refer to the Information Displays chapter.
You can select the desired steering feel using the information display
control. The settings are:
• Standard: Default factory setting.
• Sport: Slightly higher effort required for steering with more road force
felt through the steering wheel.
• Comfort: Slightly less effort required for steering with less road force
felt through the steering wheel.
After selecting the desired setting, you may feel a soft feedback bump in
the steering wheel when the changeover occurs.
186 Driving Aids
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked
it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available)
or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading
your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
Load Carrying 187
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
188 Load Carrying
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Load Carrying 189
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
190 Load Carrying
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult
your authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Load Carrying 191
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be:
1,400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1,400 - 1,100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be:
635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
192 Load Carrying
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you
have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the
vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb.
(45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 1,200 = - 240 lb. No, you
do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would be:
635kg-(2x99kg)-(12x45kg)=635-198-540=-103kg.You
will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you
remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:
1,400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1,400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
In metric units, the calculation would be:
635kg-(2x99kg)-(9x45kg)=635-198-405=32kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Load Carrying 193
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Your vehicle is capable of towing a trailer up to 1000 lb (454 kg) gross
trailer weight with a maximum tongue load of 100 lb (45 kg). Do not
tow with the Boss 302, Boss 302 Laguna Seca, GT Deluxe or Shelby
GT500 models; they are not rated to tow a trailer.
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to your
scheduled maintenance information.
For load specification terms found on the label and instructions on
calculating your vehicle’s load, refer to the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of the vehicle
load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the
axle. Distribute the trailer load so 10–15% of the total trailer weight is on
the tongue.
194 Towing
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Safety Chains
Always connect the safety chains to the vehicle’s hook retainers. To
connect the safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow
slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the rental agency’s instructions.
Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Ensure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up the lamps.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing-up to get the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers) and do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) to aid in engine and transmission
cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic.
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may turn off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
Towing 195
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply
the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with the grade assist feature, use this
feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade, place
wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If the vehicle is
towed incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle damage may occur.
196 Towing
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the front using wheel lift equipment,
it is recommended that the rear wheels (drive wheels) be placed on a
dolly to prevent damage to the transmission.
If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment, it
is recommended that the front wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent
damage to the front fascia.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes disabled (without access to wheel
dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration) under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward direction.
• The transmission is placed in N (Neutral). Refer to Automatic
transmission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the
transmission into N (Neutral).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. Refer to the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground, as vehicle or
transmission damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted.
Towing 197
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OPENING THE CONVERTIBLE TOP (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Do not store articles behind rear seat. Articles stored in the
convertible top stowage compartment may break the rear glass window
when the top is opened.
Note: Opening the convertible top when the top material is wet may
cause mold or mildew.
The convertible top can be opened with the side windows down. The
windows will automatically lower when opening or closing the top.
The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is stationary or
traveling under 3 mph (5 km/h).
To open the convertible top:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The ignition must be on. It is
recommended that the engine is running when opening the top to
prevent draining the battery.
2. Check the convertible top stowage compartment behind the rear seat
to be sure it is empty. Make sure the convertible top outer surface is free
of debris.
Note: The latch handles must be
pulled downward fully to allow the
latch to fully rotate into the open
position.
198 Convertible Top
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Unclamp the top from the windshield header by pulling each latch
handle down and then rotating the latch to the rear until it clears the
header.
Note: If the top has not been opened for some time and sticks to the
windshield header, push the front of the top up slightly with your hand
to loosen it.
4. Press and hold the convertible
top switch on the overhead console
until the windows are completely
down and the top is completely
stored.
USING THE BOOT
Installing the Boot
WARNING: Always secure the retaining clips and boot straps on
the vehicle or the boot may come loose while driving.
Note: Be sure the boot is secure on the vehicle before driving. Improper
installation can result in loss or damage of the boot.
Convertible Top 199
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Install the boot on the vehicle by hooking the boot retaining clips on
the back panel.
2. Install the boot on the right side tucking in the front part of the boot
in the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.
3. Install the boot on the left side tucking in the front part of the boot in
the quarter panel and hooking the retaining clip on the side.
4. Tuck the boot corners behind the shoulder belts.
5. Secure the boot straps on the rear seat hooks behind the rear seat.
Removing the Boot
1. Unhook the boot straps from the rear seat hooks.
2. Push the boot down unhooking the boot retaining clips.
3. Lift the boot off the vehicle.
200 Convertible Top
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Storing the Boot
1. Position the boot right-side up
and fold each side of the boot
inward.
2. Turn the boot upside down and
fold the left side of the boot inward.
3. Fold the right side inward and
secure the boot with the strap.
Stow the boot in the trunk.
Convertible Top 201
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLOSING THE CONVERTIBLE TOP
Note: The convertible top will not operate unless the vehicle is
stationary or traveling under 3 mph (5 kmh).
Note: Make sure that the latch handles are pulled down and in the fully
opened position before the top makes contact with the windshield
header. This allows for hand clearance and proper closure of the top.
To close the convertible top:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. The ignition must be on. It is
recommended that the engine is running when opening the top to
prevent draining the battery.
2. Press and hold the convertible
top switch until the windows lower
completely and the top unfolds and
moves forward toward the
windshield header.
Make sure the latch handles are
pulled down and in the fully opened
position before the top and the
windshield header make contact.
3. Continue pressing the convertible top switch to close the top
completely. The top must be flush with the header.
4. Pull down on the drivers latch
handle and rotate it all the way
forward into the windshield header.
5. Press the latch handle up into the
stowed position to secure the latch.
6. Pull down on the passengers side
latch handle and rotate it all the
way forward into the windshield
header.
7. Press the latch handle up into the stowed position to secure the latch.
Note: If the top has been open for an extended period of time or if the
temperature is low, the top material may shrink slightly. If this happens,
pull on the latch handles or the center grip to fasten to top
202 Convertible Top
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BREAKING-IN
Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive
continuously at the same speed for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
new vehicle operation. Vary your speed frequently in order to give the
moving parts a chance to break in.
Drive your new vehicle at least 1,000 miles (1,600 km) before towing a
trailer.
Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils since
these additives may prevent piston ring seating.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
Driving Hints 203
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Drive through water in an emergency only, and not
as part of normal driving.
WARNING: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air
filter.
Note: Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission
or air intake and can cause internal vehicle damage or cause it to stall.
Note: Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be
limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely
damage your engine or your vehicle
may stall.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
as quickly as dry brakes.
204 Driving Hints
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal
clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Driving Hints 205
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING (Continued)
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
206 Driving Hints
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Getting roadside assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit)
• battery jump start
•
lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s responsibility)
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5L) of
gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Fuel
delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 km) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 km) from the disablement
location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 35 miles (56 km).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Roadside Emergencies 207
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s information
portfolio in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers
will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Getting roadside assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles sold in Canada : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please refer to your Warranty Guide or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the center console next
to the gearshift lever. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
208 Roadside Emergencies
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off and wait approximately 10 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Preparing Your Vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may have firm soft shifts, firm shifts or both. This operation
is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
Roadside Emergencies 209
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor/fuel injection system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
4
2
1
3
210 Roadside Emergencies
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
4
1
3
2
Roadside Emergencies 211
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform
all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com
These are some of the items that can be found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
212 Customer Assistance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
Customer Assistance 213
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle
with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse
the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement
vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
214 Customer Assistance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If
a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure
outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before
an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided
and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all
findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision,
Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision
within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203–1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
Customer Assistance 215
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA
ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
216 Customer Assistance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized dealer.
If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
Customer Assistance 217
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
218 Customer Assistance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if
it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
Customer Assistance 219
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
15
220 Fuses
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to
Changing the Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 80A* Passenger compartment fuse panel
2 — Not used
3 — Not used
4 30A* Blower motor relay
Fuses 221
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
5 20A* Power point (body)
6 40A* Rear defroster relay
7 40A* Cooling fan relay
8 40A* Anti-lock brake system pump
9 30A* Wipers
10 30A* Anti-lock brake system valve
11 — Not used
12 20A* Differential fluid pump (Shelby only)
13 20A** Fuel pump relay (non-Shelby)
25A** Fuel pump relay (Shelby only)
14 20A** Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)
15 10A** Intercooler pump relay (Shelby only)
16 20A** Heated seats
17 10A** Alternator sense
18 20A* Auxiliary body module
19 30A* Starter relay
20 30A* Rear amplifier (Shaker Pro radio)
21 30A* Powertrain relay
22 20A* Power point (instrument panel)
23 10A** Powertrain control module keep-alive
power
24 10A** Brake on/off power
25 10A** A/C compressor relay
26 20A** Left high intensity discharge headlamp
relay
27 20A** Right high intensity discharge headlamp
relay
28 — Not used
29 30A* Passenger front window
30 — Not used
31 30A* Passenger power seat
32 30A* Driver power seat
222 Fuses
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
33 30A* Front amplifier (Shaker radio)
34 30A* Driver front window motor
35 40A* Convertible top motor
36 Diode Fuel diode
37 — Not used
38 15A** Fuel injectors (Shelby only)
39 5A** Heated mirrors
40 15A** Powertrain control module vehicle power 4
– ignition coil
41 G8VA relay Fuel pump relay
42 G8VA relay Intercooler pump relay (Shelby only)
43 G8VA relay A/C compressor relay
44 G8VA relay Fuel pump relay #2 (Shelby only)
45 5A** Powertrain control module run/start
46 5A** Powertrain control module vehicle power 3
– general powertrain components
47 15A** Powertrain control module vehicle power 1
48 15A** Powertrain control module vehicle power 5
49 15A** Powertrain control module vehicle power 2
– emissions related powertrain components
50 Full ISO relay Cooling fan relay (high)
51 Full ISO relay Blower motor relay
52 Full ISO relay Starter relay
53 Full ISO relay Rear defroster relay
54 Full ISO relay Front wiper relay
55 Full ISO relay Cooling fan relay (low)
56 — Not used
57 Full ISO relay Powertrain control module relay
58 High current
relay
Differential fluid pump (Shelby only)
* Cartridge Fuses ** Mini Fuses
Fuses 223
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located in the lower passenger side area behind the
kick panel. Open the trim panel door and remove the fuse cover to
access the fuses.
Use the fuse puller tool provided, located inside the fuse cover, to
remove a fuse.
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
1 30A Driver rear window (convertible only)
2 15A Not used (spare)
3 15A SYNC威
4 30A Passenger rear window (convertible only)
5 10A Brake transmission shift interlock
6 20A Turn signals, Hazard flashers
7 10A Left low beam headlamp
224 Fuses
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
8 10A Right low beam headlamp
9 15A Courtesy lamps
10 15A Switch illumination, Pony projection lights
11 10A Security module
12 7.5A Power mirrors
13 5A Not used (spare)
14 10A Center information display, Electronic
finish panel, Global position system
15 10A Climate control
16 15A Not used (spare)
17 20A Power door locks, Trunk release
18 20A Not used (spare)
19 25A Not used (spare)
20 15A Diagnostic connector
21 15A Fog lamps
22 15A Park lamps, License lamps
23 15A High beam headlamps
24 20A Horn
25 10A Demand lighting (battery saver), Visor
vanity lamps
26 10A Cluster (battery)
27 20A Ignition switch feed
28 5A Audio mute (start)
29 5A Camera (run/start)
30 5A Temperature sensor motor
31 10A Restraints control module
32 10A Reverse parking aid (non-Shelby), Vehicle
dynamics control module (Shelby only)
33 10A Not used (spare)
34 5A Electronic stability control
35 10A Auxiliary body module run/start
Fuses 225
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Number
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Components
36 5A Anti-theft system
37 10A Rear defroster relay coil
38 20A Not used (spare)
39 20A Radio/Navigation
40 20A Not used (spare)
41 15A Accessory delay (windows, automatic
dimming rear view mirror [including
microphone and compass] and door
switch III)
42 10A Not used (spare)
43 10A Heated seat relay coils
44 10A Not used (spare)
45 5A Wiper relay and module, Blower relay
46 7.5A Passenger airbag deactivation indicator,
Occupant classification sensor
47 30A Circuit
Breaker
Not used (spare)
48 Relay Accessory delay relay (windows, automatic
dimming rear view mirror [including
microphone and compass] and door
switch III)
Auxiliary Relay with Heated Seats (If Equipped)
Vehicles equipped with heated seats have a relay box located under the
driver seat. This box contains two relays for the driver and passenger
heated seats.
226 Fuses
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers that
are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to
find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Maintenance 227
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located on the driver’s side kick panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.
228 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
3.7L V6 engine
A. Battery
B. Engine oil dipstick
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Brake fluid reservoir
E. Air filter assembly
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
H. Power distribution box
A
G
F
E
H
D
CB
Maintenance 229
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5.0L V8 engine
A. Battery
B. Engine oil filler cap
C. Engine oil dipstick
D. Brake fluid reservoir
E. Air filter assembly
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
H. Power distribution box
230 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine shield
Some vehicles may be equipped with an aero-shield under the engine.
Remove the front fasteners of the shield to gain access for service. This
includes oil and filter changes.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A.–MIN
B. – MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil immediately.
Adding engine oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Maintenance 231
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications for more information.
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feel a strong resistance.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the coolant level
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information.
Note: Make sure that the level is at the FULL COLD level or within the
COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir.
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240E available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
COLD FILL RANGE.
If the level is below the COLD FILL RANGE, add coolant immediately.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
232 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adding engine coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark of
the COLD-FILL RANGE.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives as
they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
•
DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm
engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with Motorcraft威
Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with prediluted engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
Maintenance 233
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
•
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See the
technical specifications chart in theCapacities and Specifications
chapter.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
Note: It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
Note: It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
Note: A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted
engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection.
234 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area.
• The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
• The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will
automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Maintenance 235
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot. The hot coolant is under pressure and
may cause serious burns.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked and, if required, added by an
authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have an underhood transmission
fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
236 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug. It is located
on the passenger side of the
transmission.
2. Remove the filler plug and inspect
the fluid level.
3. For vehicles equipped with a V6 engine, the correct manual
transmission fill level is at the lower edge of the filler hole. For vehicles
equipped with a V8 engine, the correct manual transmission fill level is
1/2 inch (1.3 cm) below the edge of the filler hole.
4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening to bring the fluid up to the
recommended levels.
5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to the technical
specifications chart in the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID CHECK
Brake and clutch (if equipped) systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
For Shelby fuel filter requirements, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
Maintenance 237
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result
in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
238 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft威 maintenance-free battery which
normally does not require additional water during its life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Battery relearn
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
Maintenance 239
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized
recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
2. Squeeze the locking tabs to release
the blade from the arm and pull the
blade away from the arm to remove it.
3. Attach the new blade to the arm
and snap it into place.
Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
240 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
V6 engine
V8 engine
1. Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover.
2. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing.
3. Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or
debris and to ensure good sealing.
Maintenance 241
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
5. Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps. Be sure
that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air
cleaner housing.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical aim adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (2) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp to the
ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well). The center of the lamp is
markedbya3mmcircleontheheadlamp lens.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the other.
On the wall or screen you will
observe a flat zone of high intensity
light located at the top of the right
hand portion of the beam pattern. If
the top edge of the high intensity
light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will
need to be adjusted.
242 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp.
5. Then usea7mmAllenwrench or a Phillips screwdriver to adjust the
headlamp up or down. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS
VEHICLE AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp assembly condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets)
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens
Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water
leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Maintenance 243
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing HID headlamp bulbs
The headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity discharge” source.
These lamps operate at a high voltage. When the bulb is burned out, the
bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized
dealer.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the hex head screws attaching the beauty shield at the top,
forward edge of the engine compartment just aft of the headlamps.
3. Remove the beauty shield to gain access to the front parking lamp/turn
signal assembly.
4. Rotate the socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing front sidemarker bulb
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Remove the hex head screws
attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield.
3. Remove the underbody forward
aeroshield to gain access to the
front sidemarker assembly.
4. Rotate the socket counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly.
244 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of socket.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (V6) (if equipped)
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position and open the hood.
2. Remove the hex head screws
attaching the underbody forward
aeroshield.
3. Remove the underbody forward
aeroshield to gain access to the fog
lamp assembly.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the bulb by pulling
it straight off.
5. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove from the lamp assembly.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing fog lamp bulbs (GT)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamp bulbs. It is designed to last
the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is recommended that
you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing tail lamp/brake/rear turn signal lamps
Your vehicle is equipped with LED tail lamp/brake/rear turn signal lamps.
It is designed to last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it
is recommended that you see your authorized dealer.
Replacing backup bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with LED backup lamps. They are designed to
last the life of the vehicle. If replacement is required, it is recommended
that you see your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 245
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing rear sidemarker lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and locate the
sidemarker on the rear bumper fascia.
2. Insert a flathead screwdriver between the rear of the sidemarker lens
and the bumper fascia.
3. Push the screwdriver to the front of the vehicle and then slide it
towards you to pop out the lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of socket.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position.
2. Remove the two screws and the
lens from the license plate lamp
assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight out
from the lamp assembly.
Install new bulb(s) in reverse order.
246 Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Trade Number
* HID (high intensity discharge) headlamp D3S
Front park/turn lamp 7444NA (amber)
Sidemarker (front/rear) 194
Fog lamp
LED (GT)
H11 (V6)
* Tail lamp, brake lamp, turn lamp (LED) LED
* High-mount stoplamp (LED) LED
* Backup lamp LED
License plate lamp C5WL
Dome/Map lamp 168
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
* To replace these lamps - see your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 247
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
248 Vehicle Care
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash
off as soon as possible.
Exterior chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as
you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the
cleaner to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean,
dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning plastic exterior parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover.
Vehicle Care 249
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Convertible top and padded molding
For vinyl tops, wash with Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
For cloth tops wash with a high quality convertible top
cleaner/protectant.
• Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive materials or cleaners.
• Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the
cleanability of vinyl material.
• Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the
convertible top and windows may cause water leaks and possible seal
damage.
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
250 Vehicle Care
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Spray Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other
organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or
chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the
windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to
replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Vehicle Care 251
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
252 Vehicle Care
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish
of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner . Dry the area with
a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
Vehicle Care 253
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and
brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
254 Vehicle Care
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to
prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more), fuel
may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer product to
the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage periods
exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label. The vehicle
should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the additive
throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Vehicle Care 255
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing vehicle from storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 ft (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
256 Vehicle Care
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or “LT” type tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Wheels and Tires 257
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing
plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
258 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver ’s seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Wheels and Tires 259
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on “P” Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
260 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those
with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
Wheels and Tires 261
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s
seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
262 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
M. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for “LT ”
Type Tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
B
C
B
D
Wheels and Tires 263
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on “T” Type Tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades do
not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Load Carrying section.
A
B
C
D
E
264 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or
“blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Wheels and Tires 265
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or
Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
266 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar spare tire
and wheel assembly information section for description): Store and
maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see
the Dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly information section for
description): Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the
valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these “wear bars”,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
Wheels and Tires 267
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
268 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is
not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power
transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Wheels and Tires 269
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest
safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your
safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
270 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Rear-wheel drive (RWD) vehicles
(front tires at top of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Wheels and Tires 271
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SUMMER TIRES (IF EQUIPPED)
Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer
tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the
tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, Ford does not recommend using summer tires
when temperatures drop to approximately 40°F (5°C) or below (depending
on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow/ice conditions. Like
any tire, summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental
conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, Ford recommends using
Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for
extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle may have all-weather treads to provide traction
in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or if the
law requires them.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Chains may damage aluminum wheels.
• Use only SAE Class S chains with P225/60R17 tires on the rear of the
vehicle only.
• Do not use tire chains with any other size tires. Use of SAE Class S
chains or other chain types on tires other than a P225/60R17 will
damage the vehicle
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
272 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge,
see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
Wheels and Tires 273
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a TPMS
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an
authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge, refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light
turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be
checked. Visit www.checkmytires.org for additional information.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare,
the TPMS will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged
road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.
274 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with a
TPMS in this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no
longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following
chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Solid warning
light
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire
Label (located on the edge of
driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the
vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns
off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed
in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Wheels and Tires 275
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Flashing
warning light
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed
in this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated
and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires
are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any
tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
276 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on
the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
in this chapter for important information. If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will
illuminate when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality
of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors, refer to Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
earlier in the chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as
possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the
authorized dealer inspect the TPMS sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly , then it is
intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel
assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that
were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall
Wheels and Tires 277
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
• Tow a trailer
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
278 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else
could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Wheels and Tires 279
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not
start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only
meant for changing the tire.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard
flashers.
2. Place the gearshift lever in P (Park) and turn the engine off.
3. Block both the front and rear of
the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire. For example, if the left front tire
is flat, block the right rear wheel.
4. Remove the lug wrench, spare
tire and jack.
5. Remove the center ornament (if
equipped) from the wheel. Loosen
each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.
280 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and are depicted on the
yellow warning label on the jack.
Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
7. Put the jack in the jack notch
next to the tire you are changing.
Turn the jack handle clockwise until
the wheel is completely off the
ground.
8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
9. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall lug
nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug
nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
If you are using the temporary tire, the lug nut washers will not appear
to be flush with the rim. This is normal only when using the temporary
spare tire.
10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. Refer to Wheel
lug nut torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
12. Put flat tire, wheel ornament (if
equipped), jack and lug wrench away. Make
sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle
when you drive.
13. Unblock the wheel.
Wheels and Tires 281
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to
be used for one tire only. See your Ford authorized dealer for additional
replacement sealant canisters.
The temporary mobility kit is located in the spare tire well in the trunk.
The temporary mobility kit consists of an air compressor to reinflate the
tire and a sealing compound in a canister that will effectively seal most
punctures caused by nails or similar objects. This kit will provide a
temporary seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120 miles
(200 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
A. Air compressor (inside)
B. Diverter knob
C. On/Off button
D. Air pressure gauge
E. Sealant bottle/canister
F. Sealant filling clear tube
G. Sealant tube – tire valve
connector
H. Yellow cap tool
I. Air compressor hose
J. Air hose – tire valve connector
K. Accessory power plug
L. Casing/housing
General Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has become
severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient
air pressure. Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be
sealed with the temporary mobility kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than
1
⁄
4
inch (6.4 mm) or
damage to the tire’s sidewall. The tire may not completely seal.
A
L
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
K
J
282 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance. For this reason:
• Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Note: Do not drive further than 120 miles (200 km). Drive only to the
closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or tire repair shop to
have your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire; if the
tire is losing pressure, have the vehicle towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for use of the temporary mobility
kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and
your vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Temporary Mobility Kit
Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary
mobility kit:
•
Before operating the temporary mobility kit, make sure your vehicle is
safely off the road and away from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn’t move
unexpectedly.
•
Do not remove any foreign objects, such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the temporary mobility kit, leave the engine running (only
if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor doesn’t drain the vehicle’s battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than
15 minutes; this will help prevent the compressor from overheating.
•
Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex. Make sure that you use the
non-latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction.
• Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children.
• Only use the temporary mobility kit when the ambient temperature is
between -22°F (–30°C) and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before the use by date. The use by
date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the
sealant canister (bottle). Note: Check the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years.
• Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or collision. Always store the kit in its original location.
Wheels and Tires 283
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
•
When inflating a tire or other objects, use the black air hose only. Do not
use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application only.
• Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical
disturbance in radio, CD, and DVD player operation (if equipped). .
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire’s tread area can be repaired in two stages
with the temporary mobility kit:
• In the first stage, the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been reinflated, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance (approximately 4 miles [6 km]) to distribute
the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to check the tire pressure and
adjust, if necessary, to the vehicle’s tire inflation pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing Compound and Air
WARNING: Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility kit
while inflating the tire. If you notice any unusual bulges or
deformations in the tire’s sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
WARNING: If the tire doesn’t inflate to the recommended tire
pressure within 15 minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.
Preparation
Park the vehicle in a safe, level and secure area, away from moving
traffic. Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking brake and turn the
engine off. Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the
temporary mobility kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire. If a puncture
is located in the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing.
284 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to the
tire valve, turning clockwise. Make sure the connection is tightly fastened.
4. Plug the power cable into the
12-volt power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the
top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash.
6. Note: Start the engine only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a
well-ventilated area.
7. Turn dial (A) counterclockwise to
the sealant position. Turn on the kit
by pressing the on button (B).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure
listed on the tire label located on
the driver’s door or the door jamb
area.
Note: When the sealing compound is first added into the tire, the air
pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a higher
value; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. The pressure
A
B
Wheels and Tires 285
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
will drop after about 30 seconds of operation. The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
9. When the recommended tire pressure is reached, turn off the kit by
pressing the on/off button; disconnect the kit from the tire valve and the
power point. Re-install the valve cap on the tire valve, place the tube cap
on the metal connector, and return the kit to the stowage area.
10. Note: Immediately and cautiously, drive the vehicle 4 miles (6 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Note: If you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise while driving, reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to
the side of the road to call for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this operation.
11. After 4 miles (6 km), stop and check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure
WARNING: If you are proceeding from the First stage:
Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air section
and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi
(1.4 bar), stop and call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is above
20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
WARNING: The power plug may get hot after use and should be
handled carefully while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten
firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise.
286 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Turn the dial clockwise to the air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on/off button.
4. Adjust the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
from the tire label located on the
driver’s door or door jamb area.
Note: The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by
pressing the on/off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap on the tire and return the kit
to the stowage area.
What to do after the Tire has been Sealed
After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire, you will need to
replace the sealant canister and clear tube (hose). Sealing compound and
spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford Motor
Company dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant bottles may be
disposed of at home; however, liquid residue from the sealing compound
should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire
dealer, or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations.
Note: After the sealing compound has been used, the maximum vehicle
speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance is
120 miles (200 km). The sealed tire should be inspected immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel
must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 miles (200 km)
by performing the procedure from Second stage: Checking tire pressure
listed previously.
PSI
BAR
Wheels and Tires 287
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removal of the sealant canister from the temporary mobility kit
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end
of the clear tube.
3. Using the yellow cap tool, press
the tab located on the temporary
mobility kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant
canister.
288 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Installation of the sealant canister to the temporary mobility kit
1. Align the sealant canister with
the temporary mobility kit housing.
2. Once aligned, seat the sealant
canister by lightly pushing down
until you hear an audible click.
3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with the removal or installation
of the sealant canister, consult your Ford Motor Company authorized
dealer for assistance.
Wheels and Tires 289
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Be sure to check the sealant
compound’s “use by” date regularly.
The “use by” date is on the lower
right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister
(bottle). The sealant canister should be replaced after four years.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
size/Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
1
⁄
2
x 20 100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole (1) and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
290 Wheels and Tires
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 3.7L V6 Engine 5.0L V8 Engine
Cubic inches 227 302
Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-5-4-8-6-3-7-2
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch
(1.25-1.35 mm)
0.049–0.053 inch
(1.25–1.35 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5:1 11.0:1
For Shelby GT500 octane requirements, see the Shelby GT500 Supplement.
DRIVEBELT ROUTING
1. Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine.
3.7L V6 engine
5.0L V8 engine
Capacities and Specifications 291
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
Specification
Brake fluid and (clutch
fluid-if equipped)
Between MIN and
MAX lines on
reservoir
Motorcraft威 High
Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Door weatherstrips — Silicone Lubricant
XL-6 /
ESR-M13P4-A
Door latch, hood latch,
auxiliary hood latch,
striker plates, seat tracks
and fuel filler door hinge
—
Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)
XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B
Engine coolant
3
12.4 quarts (11.7L)
(3.7L engine)
Motorcraft威 Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
•VC-3DIL-B (US)
•CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
13.0 quarts (12.3L)
(5.0L engine)
292 Capacities and Specifications
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
Specification
Engine oil
6
6.0 quarts (5.7L)
(3.7L engine)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
(US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil
(Canada)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil
(Canada)
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20-LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A with API
Certification Mark
8.0 quarts (7.6L)
(5.0L engine)
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft威 Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Rear axle fluid
1
5.0 pints (2.4L)
Motorcraft威 SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL /
WSP-M2C192-A
Automatic transmission
fluid
2,4
11.9 quarts (11.2L)
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Manual transmission fluid
(3.7L engine)
5
2.7 quarts (2.6L)
Motorcraft威 Full Synthetic
Manual Transmission Fluid
XT-M5-QS /
WSD-M2C200-D
Manual transmission fluid
(5.0L engine)
5
Capacities and Specifications 293
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity
Ford part name or
equivalent
Ford part number / Ford
Specification
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate (US)
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer Fluid
(Canada)
ZC-32-A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Fuel tank 16.0 gallons (60.6L) — —
1
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Traction-Lok or TORSEN威 axles.
Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does not require changing unless the axle has
been submerged in water.
2
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other
than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Approximate dry capacity, including cooler and tubes. Fluid level should be checked by an authorized
dealer.
5
Service refill capacity is covered under Checking and adding manual transmission fluid in this
chapter.
6
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A and display the API Certification Mark.
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy benefit
while maintaining the durability of your engine.
Using oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine
performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emission levels.
294 Capacities and Specifications
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 3.7L V6 engine 5.0L V8 engine
Air filter element FA-1897 FA-1897
Battery
2
BXT-96R-590 BXT-96R-590
Oil filter FL-500-S FL-500-S
Spark plugs
1
SP520 SP519
Cabin air filter FP53 FP53
Windshield wiper
blade
WW-2201-PF (driver side)
WW-2001-PF (passenger side)
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
2
For battery replacement of the Mustang Boss 302, use Motorcraft威
battery BXT-96R-500.
Capacities and Specifications 295
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
296 Capacities and Specifications
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the
driver’s seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Six-speed manual transmission (MT82) X
Six-speed automatic transmission (6R80) 3
Capacities and Specifications 297
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Ford.com (U.S. only).
Ford Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. Ford Motor Company will repair or
replace any properly dealer-installed Ford Custom Accessories found to
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective
accessories. The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides
you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Quarter window louvers • Splash guards
• Front end covers • Side window deflectors
• Grille inserts • Wheels
• Hood vents • Custom graphics*
• Graphic stripes • Side scoops
• Rear spoilers • Body kits
Interior style
• Floor mats • Illuminated gear shift knob*
• Sport pedals •I lluminated door sill plates
• Flexible visor storage system (tissue dispenser, organizer, CD holder)
• Auto dimming rearview mirror with compass and temperature
Lifestyle
• Ash cup / smoker’s package • Cargo net
• Soft cargo organizers • Cargo area protectors
298 Accessories
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Peace of mind
• Remote start • Full vehicle covers
• Vehicle security systems • Keyless entry keypad
• Wheel locks • Locking fuel plug
• Bumper mounted parking assist system*
*Ford Licensed Accessories (FLA) are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Ford Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the FLA product limited warranty offered by
the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
• Any non-Ford custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner, may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
Accessories 299
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind” protection
beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
300 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your
vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention
for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades • Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
California)
• Shock absorbers
• Clutch disc • Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
Ford Extended Service Plan 301
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN!
Name
To learn more, call our
Ford
ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377, and don't forget to ask about our interest free payment
program, allowing you all the security and benefits Ford
ESP
has to offer while paying over time. Your pre-approved with
no credit checks,no hassles!
Or, complete the information below and mail this to:
Ford
ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-9933
ADDRESS
APT. #
STATE ZIP CITY
E-MAIL
(PLEASE PRINT)
302 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln
Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
Ford Extended Service Plan 303
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification
training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask
your dealership about the training and certification their technicians, have
received. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s important
to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞 Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft威 and Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts branded replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12000 mile (20000 km) parts and labor limited
warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet Ford
specifications and depending on the part it could affect emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
304 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protecting your investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of
your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is imperative that scheduled
maintenance be completed at the designated intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ (IOLM)
system which displays a message in the message center at the proper oil
change service interval; this interval may be up to one year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km). When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the message center display, it’s time for
an oil change; the oil change must be done within two weeks or
500 miles (800 km) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ must
be reset after each oil change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
If your message center is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) from your last oil change.
Note: The Shelby威 GT500威 does not have an IOLM system; refer to your
Shelby GT500 supplement for oil change service intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple complex
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That’s why it’s important
to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine Ford replacement parts.
Parts other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized remanufactured
parts that are used for maintenance replacement or for the service of
components affecting emission control must be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. It is the
owner’s responsibility to determine the equivalency of such parts. Please
consult your Warranty Guide for complete warranty information.
Ford strongly recommends the using only genuine Ford, Motorcraft威 or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement for parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
the Owner Manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual. Additional
chemicals or additives not approved by Ford and are not recommended
as part of normal maintenance. Please consult your Warranty Manual
for complete warranty information.
Scheduled Maintenance 305
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Oils, fluids and flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six months intervals.
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.
306 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection – Recommended each visit
Accessory drive belt(s) Half-shaft dust boots (if equipped)
Battery performance Horn operation
Clutch operation (if equipped) Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Engine air filter Suspension component for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system Steering and linkage
Exterior lamps and hazard
warning system operation
Tires for wear and proper pressure,
including spare
Fluid levels*; fill if necessary Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
For oil and fluid leaks Washer spray and wiper operation
*Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, manual and automatic transmission
(with an underhood dipstick), power steering (if equipped) and
window washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It’s a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It’s your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You’ll know
what’s been checked, what’s okay, as well as those things that may
require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle inspection
is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
Scheduled Maintenance 307
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
308 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ – 3.7L and 5.0L Engines
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ that
determines when the engine oil should be changed based on how your
vehicles is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce
environmental waste at the same time. This means you won’t have to
remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule; the vehicle lets
you know when an oil change is due by displaying OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED in the message center. The following table is intended to
provide examples of vehicle use and its impact on engine oil change
intervals; it is provided as a guideline only. Actual engine oil change
intervals will depend on several factors and will generally decrease with
severity of use.
Note: The Shelby威 GT500威 message center is NOT equipped with this
feature; refer to your Shelby GT500 supplement for oil change service
intervals.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Miles (km) Vehicle use and examples
7500-10000
(12000-16000)
Normal
– Normal commuting with highway driving
– No, or moderate, load/towing
– Flat to moderately hilly roads
– No extended idling
5000-7499
(8000-11999)
Severe
– Moderate to heavy load/towing
– Mountainous or off-road conditions
– Extended idling
– Extended hot or cold operation
3000-4999
(4000-7999)
Extreme
– Maximum load/towing
– Extreme hot or cold operation
Scheduled Maintenance 309
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Normal Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change
interval as indicated
by the message
center
Change engine oil and filter
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread
depth
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended)
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if
equipped with dipstick); consult dealer for
requirements
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake
linings, hoses and parking brake
Inspect cabin air filter (if equipped)
Inspect engine cooling system strength and hoses
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields
Inspect rear axle and U-joints; lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings (AWD vehicles)
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped)
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension,
tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints; lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km) between
service intervals
310 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional maintenance items
1
Miles (x 1,000) 20 30 40 60 80 90 100 120 140 150
Kilometers (x 1,000) 32 48 64 96 128 144 160 192 225 240
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped) • ••• •••
Replace climate-controlled seat filter (if equipped) •••••
Replace engine air filter •••••
Change engine coolant
2
•
Replace spark plugs •
Inspect accessory drive belt(s) ••
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter •
Change manual transmission fluid •
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced within the last
100,000 miles (160,000 km)
•
1
Additional maintenance items can be performed within 3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the last oil change. Do not exceed
the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km), then every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Scheduled Maintenance 311
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
312 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 313
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
314 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS – 3.7L AND 5.0L ENGINES
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services in the preceding table when specified or within
3,000 miles (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
appearing in the information display.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28,751 miles (46,270 km); perform the 30,000 mile (48,000 km)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on
but the odometer reads 30,000 miles (48,000 km); perform the engine air
filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ was reset at
25,000 miles [40,000 km].)
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
information display and perform services listed in
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid
Extensive idling and/or low-speed driving for long distances as
in heavy commercial use (i.e. delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
information display and perform services listed in
Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km)
Replace spark plugs
Scheduled Maintenance 315
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or dusty
roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace cabin air filter (if equipped)
Replace engine air filter
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure
tread depth
Every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or
6 months
Change engine oil and filter
Every 50,000 miles
(80,000 km)
Change manual transmission fluid
Reset your Intelligent Oil Life Monitor™ after each engine oil and filter
change; refer to the Instrument Displays chapter
Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel
316 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 317
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
318 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule. They are listed
below:
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
(PTO) units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should be
changed every 3,000 miles (4,800 km) or three months, whichever comes
first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled with 75W140
synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A, part
number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles (refer to Technical specifications in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100,000 miles (160,000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Class A Motorhome: Change brake fluid every two years.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
If the available API “SM” or “SN” oils are not available, then the oil
change service interval is 3,000 mile (4,800 km).
Scheduled Maintenance 319
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Edge/MKX AWD only – vehicles operating off-road in sand during high
ambient temperatures must replace the AWD PTU (All-wheel drive
Power Transfer Unit) lube every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Engine air filter & cabin air filter replacement: Engine air filter and
cabin air filter life is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty
conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions will require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter.
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
3.7L and 5.0L engines*
Initial change 6 years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every 3 years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
*Shelby GT500 owners: Refer to the Shelby GT500 supplement
Engine coolant change log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
320 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls
• Access and play music from your portable music player
• Use 911 Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped)
• Use applications such as Pandora and Stitcher via SYNC AppLink™ (if
applicable)
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands
• Stream music from your connected phone
• Text message
• Use the advanced voice recognition system
• USB device charging (if your device supports this)
SYNC姞 321
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using it with
SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30 am-8pm EST
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC, do not:
• Operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Carefully place cords and cables where they cannot be
stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Leave playing devices in the vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. Refer to your device’s user guide for further
information.
• Attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized dealer.
322 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile
within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is
created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your
cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the
system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates
and retains an index of supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all
recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may
occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain
in the vehicle unless you delete it and are generally accessible only in the
vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no
longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada
will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist™ (if equipped),
Vehicle Health Report (if equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
SYNC姞 323
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front
of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and “Listening” appears in
the display. Say any of the following:
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.
*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.
*
“Mobile Apps” Access mobile applications.
*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*
If equipped, U.S. only
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
324 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say: The system:
“Interaction mode standard” Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
“Interaction mode advanced” Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your
request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that correct?”) If
turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested
and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise
from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from
correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
“Listening” appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
SYNC姞 325
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID
Other features such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, refer to your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in P (Park) (vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (vehicles equipped with a manual transmission).
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the PHONE hard button; when the display indicates no phone
is paired, press the Settings tab, then Add.
2. If Bluetooth is on, SYNC begins the pairing process between your
Bluetooth-enabled phone or device and SYNC. Refer to your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
4. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
5. Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system
may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as
the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
326 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in P (Park) (vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (vehicles equipped with a manual transmission).
Note: SYNC can store up to 12 previously paired phones.
1. Press the PHONE hard button; select the Settings tab, then Add.
2. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
3. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button and say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
“Call <name> at home”
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
“Call <name> on other”
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
“Dial”
*
*
If you have said “Dial”, refer to the “Dial” table below.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one), etc.
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” “/” (pound, slash)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
SYNC姞 327
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“DIAL”
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
At any time, you can say the following global commands:
GLOBAL COMMANDS
“Exit”
“Help”
“Phone”
“ Services”
*
“Vehicle Health Report”
*
“Voice settings”
*
If equipped, U.S. only
Making Calls Using the Touchscreen
Press the PHONE hard button, then choose between three ways to make
a call:
1. Use the keypad on the Phone tab to manually enter a phone number
and press SEND.
2. Select the Phonebook tab (if the desired number is saved in the
downloaded phone book information). Use the directory buttons to
browse to the desired contact, then press DIAL. (This is a
phone-dependent feature.)
3. Select the Call History tab (if the desired number is saved in the
downloaded call history information), then press DIAL. (This is a
phone-dependent feature.)
Making Calls Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say “Phone”.
1. Say “Call <phone book contact name>” or “Dial”, then the desired
number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” or “Call” to initiate
the call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete”; to erase all spoken digits, say
“Clear”.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
328 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc.
To access:
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Send Receive an incoming call, make an outgoing
call or redial.
End End or ignore a call.
Privacy Mode
*
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Hold Call
*
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Hold on/off appears.
Join Calls
*
Join two separate calls.
Quick Dial Save frequently called numbers for quick
access. You can select and save numbers from
the Phonebook or Call History tabs.
*
This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC姞 329
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features such as 911
Assist™, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Apps.
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select from the following:
When you select: You can:
Phone Access basic options such as making calls,
ending calls and joining calls.
Phonebook
1
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
SYNC categorizes your contacts alphabetically
in the Quick Sort buttons on the right of the
screen. The buttons are highlighted if there
are contacts stored in that category. Press the
highlighted category to access those listings.
Call History
2
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
Text Messaging Allows you to send, download and delete text
messages.
Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, factory defaults,
master reset, etc.).
SYNC Apps Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
1
This is a speed-dependent and phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a phone-dependent feature.
330 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press View to receive and open the text message.
2. Press Listen to have SYNC read the message to you.
3. Press Reply to send a message back to the sender.
4. Press Dial to call the sender.
5. Press Cancel to exit the screen.
If you select View, you can:
• Listen as SYNC reads the message to you aloud.
• Compose your own message.*
• Reply to the message.*
• Forward the text message to someone in your phone book or to a
phone number.*
* This is a speed-dependent feature.
SYNC姞 331
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Sending Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Text Messaging tab, then press Compose.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, “Unsupported” appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
Pre-defined text message options
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Call me
Call you later
Can’t talk right now
Can’t wait to see you
I love you
I need more directions
I’m stuck in traffic
No
Thanks
Too funny
Where R you?
Why?
Yes
1. Select the desired text message. Each text message is sent with the
following signature: “This message was sent from my <Ford or
Lincoln>”.
2. Press Recipients, then choose who to send it to using the Phone
Book or Phone Number.
332 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Status
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Set Ringer
Select which ring tone sounds during an
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer
1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
SYNC姞 333
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Modify Phonebook
Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e.
add, delete, download). Press OK to select
and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. “Push” the desired
contact(s) on your phone. Refer to your
phone’s user guide on how to ’push’ contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Auto Download
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Return
Exit the current menu.
334 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as “primary” as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
Pair additional phones to the system.
1. Press OK to select, then again when Find
SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user guide to
put your phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN
appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC.
4. When Set As Primary Phone? appears, press OK.
Scroll to toggle between Yes and No, then press OK.
5. Depending on the functionality of your phone, you
may be asked additional questions (i.e. if you would
like to download your phonebook). Scroll and use OK
to select your responses.
Connect
Bluetooth Device
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of previously
paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press
OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a time.
When another phone is connected, the previous one is
disconnected.
SYNC姞 335
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Set As Primary
Phone?
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired
phone. Press OK to confirm
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the primary
phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone is
selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is
marked with an *.
Set Bluetooth
On/Off
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off.
When the desired selection is chosen, press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth
devices and deactivates all Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired phone.
Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to
confirm.
Delete All
Devices
Delete all previously paired phones (and all
information originally saved with those phones).
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Settings tab, then Advanced.
3. Use the arrow buttons to choose between things like Bluetooth
On/Off, 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report, Incoming Call Ringer, etc.
336 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides access to traffic,
directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist™: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides a diagnostic
and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
•
SYNC AppLink™: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately
to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five
seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not becoming a projectile or get damaged in a
collision. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
SYNC姞 337
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
For more information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, refer to the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, refer to the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system, perform the
following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist appears in the display.
3. Scroll to select ON, then press OK. Set On appears in the display.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, perform the
following:
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Settings tab.
3. Press Advanced. Select 911 Assist, then turn the system on.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
338 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial
911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
SYNC姞 339
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to use.
Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or subscription
associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register to use this
feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer
340 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system, run a report by
performing the following (after the vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds):
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health appears in the display, then press OK.
3. Select from one of the options listed in the following table.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, run a report by
performing the following (after the vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds):
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the Settings tab.
3. Press Advanced, then select Vehicle Health Report.
4. Select from one of the options listed in the following table.
Vehicle Health Report options
Automatic Reports Press OK and select on or off. Select “On” to
have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.
Note: You must first turn this feature on
before you can select the mileage intervals at
which you would like to be prompted.
Mileage Intervals Press OK. Scroll to select between 5,000,
7,500 or 10,000 mile intervals and press OK to
make your selection.
Run Report Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
un-serviced vehicle inspection items from
your authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and diagnostic
information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to Vehicle Health
Report may also collect additional vehicle information. Ford may use the
vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle information, do not run the feature or
set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. Refer to
www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle Health Report Terms and Conditions, and
Privacy Statement - for more information.
SYNC姞 341
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. Refer to the
Phone features for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do
not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
342 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
3. Once you’re connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the services portal.
5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
6. To return to the services menu, say “Services” or for help, say “Help”.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call
is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual driving
instructions as you travel towards you destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
SYNC姞 343
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Personalizing You can personalize your services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as, work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to
interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip
(such as a sports report), wait for the
listening tone, and say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
SYNC AppLink
SYNC AppLink is a software application which allows you to connect to
and use applications on your smartphone such as Pandora and Stitcher
via your SYNC system (provided your phone is compatible with these
features). For troubleshooting tips, available applications, and a list of
supported smart phone devices, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system, you can access
AppLink from the media menu, phone menu or by using voice commands.
344 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To access using the media menu:
1. Press AUX. Media Menu displays on-screen.
2. Press MENU, then scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to see a list of
available applications.
3. Once started, press MENU to access the media menu.
4. Scroll to the desired application (i.e. Pandora), then press OK. From
here you can access the features which accompany the application
such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To access using the phone menu:
1. Press the phone button. Media Menu displays on-screen.
2. Press MENU, then scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to see a list of
available applications.
3. Once started, press MENU to access the media menu.
4. Scroll to the desired application (i.e. Pandora), then press OK. From
here you can access the features which accompany the application
such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Note: iPhone威 users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order
to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone威 after
starting an application.
To access using voice commands:
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
Note: Your smart phone must be paired and connected to access
AppLink using voice commands.
If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system:
1. Press the PHONE hard button.
2. Select the SYNC APPS tab, then select Mobile Apps.
3. Select an application (for example, Pandora) or, if there are not any
listed, select Find Applications.
4. When a mobile media application has been selected, use the
on-screen display or press Mobile Apps Menu to access the features
which accompany the application such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down,
etc. For more information, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
SYNC姞 345
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the
vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories
such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod威, Zune™, “Plays from device” players, and most USB drives. SYNC
also supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has an on/off switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “User device”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands, such as:
• Play All
• Play Artist <name>
• Play Album <name>
• Play Genre <name>
• Play Playlist <name>
• Play Track <name>
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, the press Source repeatedly until USB
appears.
4. Press Music Library.
5. Select from the listed features.
Once connected, the system indexes any readable media files. (The time
required to complete this depends on the size of the media content being
indexed.) If Autoplay is on, you can access media files randomly as they
are indexed. If turned off, indexed media is not available until the
indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of
average size media and notifies you if the maximum indexing file size is
reached.
346 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “User Device”
then any of the following:
“User Device”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album <name>”
1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>”
1,3
“Play genre <name>”
1,3
“Play next folder”
2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist <name>”
1,3
“Play previous folder”
2
“Play previous track”
“Play track <name>”
1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“Voice settings”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of
any desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
SYNC姞 347
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC威 is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including
iPod威, Zune™, “Plays from device” players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device
by metadata tags. Metadata tags are descriptive software identifiers
embedded in the media files which provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as Unknown.
Media Menu Sources and Features
The User Device menu allows you to select your media source and how
to play your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.).
1. Make sure your USB device is plugged in to your system.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly to cycle
through USB, BT Audio and Line In:
When you select: You can:
Music Library Access SYNC’s many media features, such as:
Play All, Play Artists, Play Albums, Play Tracks,
Play Playlists, and Explore the USB.
Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile a
playlist for you.
The system creates a new list of similar songs
and begin playing. The metadata tags must be
populated for this feature to include each track.
Repeat
Repeat any song.
Shuffle
Randomly play available media files in the
current playlist.
Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as
Advanced menu listings (prompts, languages,
defaults, master reset, install application and
system information).
Text View additional information, if available.
348 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessing the Media Music Library
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly until USB
appears.
4. Select Music Library.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select: You can:
Play all Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time
in numerical order.
Artists
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once
selected, the system lists and then play all
artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are
less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are categorized in alphabetical
categories.
Albums
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
Genres
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
SYNC姞 349
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Playlists
Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists
your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, they are organized
into alphabetical categories.
Tracks
Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes
them into alphabetical categories.
Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port. You
can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved are
not visible.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle’s
speakers from your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
To access:
1. Make sure your paired phone is in streaming mode.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly until BT
Audio appears.
Line In (Auxiliary Input Jack)
Your system allows you to select and play music from your
portable music player over the vehicle’s speakers.
To access:
1. Make sure your paired phone is in streaming mode.
2. Press the MEDIA hard button.
3. Select the User Device tab, then press Source repeatedly until Line In
appears.
350 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth menu allows you to add, connect and delete a device as
well as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press the MEDIA hard button.
2. Select the User Device tab, then BT Devices.
3. Select from:
When you select: You can:
Connect Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
Add Add a device through Discovery and
Discoverable modes.
Delete Delete a paired media device.
Advanced Access menu listings (prompts, languages,
defaults, master reset, install application and
system information).
SYNC姞 351
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an on-line chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
A lot of
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
During a call, I can
hear the other
person but they
cannot hear me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing the
device’s battery, then trying again.
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try “pushing” your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• Use the “SYNCmyphone”
feature available on the website.
352 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
The system says
“Phonebook
Downloaded” but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
• Try “pushing” your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
• Remove any pictures or special
ring tones associated with the
missing contact.
I’m having trouble
connecting my
phone to SYNC.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
• Check the security and “auto
accept/prompt always”’ settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
• Update your device’s software
firmware.
vTurn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is
not working on
SYNC.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC姞 353
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB/Media issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I’m having trouble
connecting my
device.
Possible device
malfunction.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
• Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
• Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-install
program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I
turn on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving
the device in your vehicle during
very hot or cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
The device is not
connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your
device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
The file may be
corrupted, OR
The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
• Make sure that all song details
are populated.
• Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
354 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report/Services (Traffic, Directions and
Information) issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
Your account may
not be activated
on the website,
OR
You may have the
wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
• This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use
it.
• Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I’m unable to
retrieve the
report on the
website, or I
receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer
information did
not load correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer.
If one is already listed, try
selecting another dealer and
logging out. Log back in and
change it back to your preferred
dealer and retrieve the report.
I’m unable to
submit a report.
This could be due
to your phone’s
compatibility, OR
Bad signal
strength, OR
Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
• Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
• Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has been
turned up.
• Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when
I tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
The phone in use
is not activated,
OR
Your phone has
ID blocker active.
• This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use
it.
• Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
• Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same
one that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
SYNC姞 355
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
You may be using
the wrong voice
commands, OR
You may be
speaking too soon
or at the wrong
time.
• Review the Phone voice
commands and the Media voice
commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
• Be aware that SYNC’s
microphone is either in your
rear view mirror or in the
headliner just above the
windshield.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
You may be using
the wrong voice
commands, OR
You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
The system may
not be “reading”
the name the
same way you are
saying it.
• Review the media voice
commands at the beginning of
the media section.
• Say the song or artist exactly
as they are listed. If you say,
“Play Artist Prince”, the system
does not play music by Prince
and the Revolution or Prince
and the New Power Generation.
• Make sure you are saying the
complete title such as
“California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
• If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “ Play
L-O-L-A”
• Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
356 SYNC姞
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
You may be using
the wrong voice
commands, OR
You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
Contacts in your
phonebook may
be very short and
similar, or they
may contain
special
characters, OR
Your phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
• Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
• Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if a contact
is saved as Joe Wilson, say “Call
Joe Wilson”.
• The system works better if
you list full names such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
• Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE as the
system does not recognize them.
• If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “ Call
J-A-K-E.”
SYNC姞 357
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NAVIGATION CONTROLS
Type 1
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
After the system initializes, the screen is divided into two sections:
• Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of screen that
displays the clock or date and useful information, depending on the
current mode.
• Display area: The touchscreen changes depending on current system
operation. Buttons are displayed in this area depending on the
current screen for you to make choices.
Note: Some features such as SIRIUS satellite radio may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
If you select: You can:
A. I (Information) Access features such as Where am I?, SIRIUS威
Travel Link™, Calendar, System Info and
Help.
B. PHONE Access the SYNC phone menu.
C. CLIMATE Access the climate menu.
358 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
D. Eject Eject a CD or DVD from the system.
E. TUNE/RPT In radio or satellite radio mode, turn to
advance in individual increments up or down
the frequency band to the desired station.
In MP3 mode, turn to advance to the next or
previous folder.
In navigation mode, hear the last spoken
navigation guidance prompt.
F. DISP Select a display mode: On, Status Bar Only,
and Off.
G. SOUND Access the sound menu.
Press while the sound menu is active to see
the menu tabs of Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade,
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) and Visualizer.
H. SEEK In radio and satellite radio mode, press
the arrow buttons to find previous or next
available stations or channels within the
currently selected Category or Genre.
In CD/DVD mode, press the arrow buttons
to select the previous or next track or
chapter.
I. MEDIA Press to access the media menu.
Press while the media menu is active to see
the available sources of CD/DVD, Jukebox and
User Device.
J. RADIO Press to access the radio menu.
Press while the radio menu is active to see
the available sources of AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1,
SAT2, and SAT3 (satellite radio).
Navigation System 359
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
K. VOL Turn to adjust the volume. Press and hold to
turn the system on and off.
Note: If a navigation route is active when the
navigation system is turned off, the route is
resumed when the system is turned on again.
L. Memory presets In radio and satellite radio mode, press to
access your saved preset stations or channels.
To save to a station or channel, tune to the
desired station or channel, then press and
hold a preset button. The sound momentarily
mutes, then returns when the preset is saved.
M. MENU Press to access the system menu.
Press while the system menu is active to see
the menu tabs of Display, Clock, Feedback
Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
N. MAP Press to access the navigation map.
Press while the map display is active to center
the map on the current vehicle position. Press
while the map display and route are active to
see the different map guidance views
O. DEST Press to access the navigation destination
entry menu.
Press while the navigation destination entry
menu is active to show additional destination
entry techniques.
P. NAV Press to access the navigation menu.
Press while the navigation menu is active to
see the navigation menu tabs.
Q. CD/DVD slot Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
360 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Type 2
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
After the system initializes, the screen is divided into two sections:
• Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of screen that
displays the clock or date and useful information, depending on the
current mode.
• Display area: The touchscreen changes depending on current system
operation. Buttons are displayed in this area depending on the
current screen for you to make choices.
Navigation System 361
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Some features such as SIRIUS satellite radio may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
If you select: You can:
A. Memory presets In radio and satellite radio mode, press to
access your saved preset stations or channels.
To save to a station or channel, tune to the
desired station or channel, then press and
hold a preset button. The sound momentarily
mutes, then returns when the preset is saved.
B. CD/DVD slot Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
C. Eject Eject a CD or DVD from the system.
D. TUNE/RPT In radio or satellite radio mode, turn to
advance in individual increments up or down
the frequency band to the desired station.
In MP3 mode, turn to advance to the next or
previous folder.
In navigation mode, hear the last spoken
navigation guidance prompt.
E. MAP Press to access the navigation map.
Press while the map display is active to center
the map on the current vehicle position. Press
while the map display and route are active to
see the different map guidance views.
F. DEST Press to access the navigation destination
entry menu.
Press while the navigation destination entry
menu is active to show additional destination
entry techniques.
G. NAV Press to access the navigation menu.
Press while the navigation menu is active to
see the navigation menu tabs.
H. I (Information) Access features such as Where am I?, SIRIUS威
Travel Link™, Calendar, System Info and
Help.
I. PHONE Access the SYNC phone menu.
362 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
J. DISP Select a display mode: On, Status Bar Only,
and Off.
K. SEEK In radio and satellite radio mode, press
the arrow buttons to find previous or next
available stations or channels within the
currently selected Category or Genre.
In CD/DVD mode, press the arrow buttons
to select the previous or next track or
chapter.
L. MENU Press to access the system menu.
Press while the system menu is active to see
the menu tabs of Display, Clock, Feedback
Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
M. SOUND Access the sound menu.
Press while the sound menu is active to see
the menu tabs of Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade,
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) and Visualizer.
N. MEDIA Press to access the media menu.
Press while the media menu is active to see
the available sources of CD/DVD, Jukebox and
User Device.
O. RADIO Press to access the radio menu.
Press while the radio menu is active to see
the available sources of AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1,
SAT2, and SAT3 (satellite radio).
P. VOL/PUSH Turn to adjust the volume. Press and hold to
turn the system on and off.
Note: If a navigation route is active when the
navigation system is turned off, the route is
resumed when the system is turned on again.
Navigation System 363
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DISPLAY MODE
You can choose to turn your screen on or off and also if you would like
to view the status bars on the top and bottom of the screen. Press DISP
to see the options.
Display mode voice commands
The following voice commands are available in display mode. If
you are not in display mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel. When prompted, say “Display mode” and then
any of the following commands.
Display mode voice commands
“Display on”
“Display off”
“Status bar”
“Brighter”
“Dimmer”
“Day”
“Night”
“Auto”
“Help”
STATUS BARS
The top status bar shows the current
mode, exterior temperature and time
and display icons if you have enabled
Bluetooth or other options.
The bottom status bar shows the
Home icon and may also show the
current driver and passenger
selected temperatures, fan speed and air flow direction, the current
mode being used, the Artist and Title of the currently playing CD, Artist
and Title for Jukebox and radio.
Note: As climate controls are vehicle-dependent, some vehicles may not
display climate readings in the status bar.
364 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Customizing your home screen
Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software, your screens
may vary in appearance from the screens shown in this section. Your
features may also be limited depending on your market. Check with your
authorized dealer for availability.
Press the house icon to access the home screen. Here you can:
• Save or view pictures
• View your current audio and climate control settings
• Display the audio visualizer
You can split the screen in to two or three different sections, or you can
choose to have one main view.
• The left side displays an uploaded photo or the map screen.
• The right side can also display the uploaded photo. The upper right
panel only displays the current audio settings. The lower right panel
displays the vehicle’s climate settings or the visualizer.
Loading photos
Note: The system is not compatible with discs written in Packet Write mode.
Note: Only the photograph(s) which meet these conditions will be displayed.
Your system allows you to save and view up to 32 photos. The photo
display has the following limitations:
• The file must be 1.5MB or smaller.
• The file extension must be JPE, JPG or JPEG.
• The file path must be 255 characters or fewer.
• Up to 256 files or folders can be displayed in one folder.
•
The CD or DVD must be ISO 9660 format, UDF format is not supported.
To load photos:
1. Touch the left side of the home screen.
2. Select Add. When the disclaimer appears asking to confirm the
supported photo formats, press OK.
3. Insert a CD-ROM which contains your photos.
4. Press OK. The photos are listed on the right half of the screen.
5.
Select either Add or Add All. The photos are now saved to the hard drive.
Editing and deleting photos
To edit photos, go to the home screen, then:
1. Touch the current photo on the home screen.
2. Select the Edit button.
3. Adjust the photo by zooming in or out, moving right, left, up or down
and also rotating left or right.
Navigation System 365
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Press the Reset button to return to the original image.
To delete a photo, select the Delete button.
To delete all photos:
1. Press the Menu hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab on the touchscreen.
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Saved photos.
Using the Touch-Sensitive Controls on Your System
Your vehicle’s centerstack has touch-sensitive switches for your
infotainment and climate control systems. To turn a feature on and off,
just touch the graphic with your finger. To get the best performance from
the touch-sensitive controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may cause a nearby control to turn
on or off.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger, you
may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
• Metal and other conductive material should be kept away from the
surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference
(i.e. control activation).
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these
controls on your bezel:
• Power: Turn the media (or climate features) on or off.
• VOL: Increase or decrease the volume.
• Fan: Increase or decrease the fan speed.
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD.
• SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes.
The screen does not change, but you see the media changes in the
lower left status bar.
•
SOUND: Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can make
adjustments to settings such as: Bass, Treble, Midrange, Balance and
Fade, THX Deep Note Demo (if equipped), DSP (if equipped),
Occupancy Mode (if equipped), and Speed Compensated Volume settings.
• Hazard flasher: Press the button to turn the hazard flashers on or off.
366 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Clean the display with a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning
glasses. If dirt or finger prints are still visible, apply a small amount of
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do
not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front
of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the
chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to
your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may also appear in the
lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (i.e.,
listening, success, failed, paused or try again).
How to use voice commands with your system
Press the voice icon; after the tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time
“Navigation”
“Climate”*
“Audio”
“Jukebox”
“Radio”
“Display mode”
“User profile”
“Disc”
“CD”
“DVD”
“Video CD”
“Line in”
“Phone”*
Navigation System 367
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
These commands can be said at any time
“Voice settings”
“USB”*
“Dial”*
“Bluetooth audio”*
“Tutorial”
“Confirmations”
“Help”
*If equipped
To access a list of all available voice commands, press the I hard button.
Select the Help tab on the touch screen, then the Voice Commands tab
and choose the desired category.
Helpful hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise
from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from
correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
“Listening” appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
Voice settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction, help
and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction which uses
candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest
level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides more detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: Confirmation prompts are short questions the
system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are
multiple possible responses to your request. If turned off, the system
simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and you may still
occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
368 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYSTEM MENU FEATURES
Your system offers many menu features such as allowing you to adjust
the touchscreen brightness, time and language, feedback and system
settings. You can access these options by pressing the MENU hard
button.
If you select: You can:
Display Adjust settings for the touch screen.
Brightness allows you to adjust screen
brightness by touching + or -.
Contrast allows you to adjust screen contrast
by touching + or -.
Day/Night Mode allows you to select Day
mode, Night mode or have the system
automatically switch for you by selecting Auto
mode.
Daytime Color allows you to select a light or
dark color for daytime screen lighting.
Note: When the headlamps are on under very
bright outdoor light conditions, the system
remains in day mode, even if night is selected.
Clock Adjust settings for the clock.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with an
in-dash analog clock, you can set the time on
this screen but it may not appear in status bar
for viewing purposes.
Display Clock allows you to turn the clock
on or off.
Format allows you to switch between 12–
and 24–hour clock display.
Auto Time Zone allows you to have the
system automatically switch the time
whenever you enter a new time zone. Note:
The system does not implement daylight
savings time.
Restore Defaults allows you to restore
system defaults.
Navigation System 369
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Feedback Train the system to better recognize your
voice. Two profiles can be created; see Voice
recognition later in this section.
Touch Screen Button Beep allows you to
select when the system sounds an audible
tone: All Buttons (whenever any system
button is touched), Touch Screen (only when
touch screen selections are made) or Off (no
audible tones at all).
Voice Volume allows you to change
navigation voice and audible tone volume by
touching + or -.
Satellite Radio Channel Name allows you
to choose to display the satellite radio channel
name.
Voice Recognition Interaction Mode allows
you to choose the level of system interaction
and feedback. Standard is the default and
provides the most interaction and feedback
using prompts. Advanced uses less feedback
and prompts.
Voice Recognition Confirmation allows you
to choose level of voice command
confirmation. Selecting On causes the system
to always ask to confirm a command.
Selecting Off causes the system to ask for
confirmation less frequently.
Voice Recognition User Profile allows you
to switch between user profiles.
370 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
System Settings Choose basic system settings.
Language allows you to choose between
English, Spanish and French.
Units allows you to choose between English
and Metric measurements.
Keyboard Layout allows you to choose
between an ABC or QWERTY keyboard.
Delete Stored Items allows you to choose to
delete all of the entries from Address Book,
Previous Destinations, Avoid Areas, Saved
Photos and Voice Recognition Profiles. Touch
View to see what entries have been stored.
Restore Factory Default Settings allows
you to restore factory default settings.
Valet Mode Lock and unlock the system using a four-digit
PIN.
Note: The PIN can be reset by simultaneously
pressing and holding presets 1 and 5 while on
the PIN entry screen. After approximately five
seconds, the system transitions to the valet
mode screen indicating that the PIN is reset.
Once you have reset the PIN, the system then
allows you to set a new PIN.
Voice Control Set the system to automatically listen for USB
or SYNC voice commands first. This
eliminates the need to say “USB” or “User
Device” before any SYNC media commands.
Navigation System 371
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LISTENING TO MUSIC
Your system offers many media options. You can access these options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM radio
Press the RADIO hard button.
To change between AM and FM1/FM2, touch the AM or FM tab.
When you select: You can:
Show Options Select from additional listening options.
Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all
radio stations.
Scan Presets allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all stations stored in the memory
presets.
Autoset Presets allows you to store the
strongest local stations available in the AM and
FM frequency bands.
HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally (where available), providing
free, crystal clear sound. Refer to the HD
Radio™ information in the following section.
1
Multicast allows you to choose which HD radio
broadcast you would like to receive. When HD
Radio broadcasts are available, this button
appears if the selected station has more than
one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in analog
and digital broadcasts. Any additional multicast
stations (HD2–HD8) are digitally broadcast and
can be accessed by pressing Multicast. Refer to
HD Radio Information in the following section
for more information.
1,2
Show Presets View the preset stations. To save a station, press
and hold one of the memory preset hard buttons
or memory preset areas on the touch screen.
There is a brief mute while the station is being
saved, then sound returns when it’s done.
372 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Set PTY/All Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
2
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If the
program type is unavailable in your reception
range, the system returns to the previous
station.
1
U.S only
2
FM1/FM2 radio tab only
Audio and radio voice commands
If you are listening to the audio system, press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the audio system, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Audio”, then any of the commands in the following
chart.
“AUDIO”
“On”
“Off ”
“Headphones”
“Headphones off”
“Jukebox”
“Disc”
“CD”
“DVD”
“Video CD”
“Radio”
“Sirius”
“SYNC”
“Line in”
“USB”
“User Device”
Navigation System 373
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“AUDIO”
“Phone”
“Read Message”
“Help”
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“On”
“Off ”
“<530–1710>”
“<87.7–107.9>”
“AM <530–1710>”
“FM <87.7–107.9>”
“AM”
“FM1”
“FM2”
“Preset <1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM1 preset <1–6>”
“FM2 preset <1–6>”
“Tune”*
“Help”
*If you have said, “Tune”, refer to the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<530–1710>”
“<87.7–107.9>”
“AM <530–1710>”
“FM <87.7–107.9>”
“AM”
“FM1”
374 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“TUNE”
“FM2”
“Preset <1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM1 preset <1–6>”
“FM2 preset <1–6>”
“Help”
HD Radio姞 information (if available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.
Your system has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than
analog broadcasts with free, crystal clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and
programming, please visit www.hdradio.com.
When this feature is enabled and you are tuned to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your
screen:
HD) logo blinks when a digital station is being acquired and is
solid when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available,
you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital
broadcasts.
The numbers that are highlighted signify available digital channels where
new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming
status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2–HD7) are only broadcast digitally.
Navigation System 375
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is activated, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the
HD logo appear if the station has a digital
broadcast.
Seek Hear the next strong radio station.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Seek repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
multicast channel, press Seek to advance to
the next strong station.
Tune Go up and down the frequency in individual
increments.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Tune repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
broadcast channel, turn to advance to the
next frequency on the band.
Set PTY/All Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
376 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Multicast Allows you to choose which HD radio
broadcast you would like to receive. When HD
Radio broadcasts are available, this button
appears if the selected station has more than
one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in analog
and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2–HD8) are digitally
broadcast and can be accessed by pressing
Multicast.
To save a multicast
station as a preset
When the channel is active on-screen, press
and hold a memory preset slot on the right of
the screen until the sound returns. There is a
brief mute, then the sound returns signifying
it was saved. When recalling a HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the
digital audio is played as the system must
once again acquire the digital signal.
If you have turned this feature off and
pressed a memory preset containing an HD
Radio broadcast station, a pop-up appears
asking you if you would like to turn the
feature back on. As with any saved radio
station, you cannot access the saved station if
your vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
Navigation System 377
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HD Radio reception/station troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2–HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stay muted unless it is able
to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When a station is first received (aside from
HD2–HD7 multicast stations), the system first
plays the station in the analog version and
then, if receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. This shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog, is known as “blending”.
378 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In order to provide the best possible experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any station issues found while listening to a station
broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Every station is independently
owned and operated. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio
streams and data fields are accurate.
See the following chart for potential station issues.
Potential station issues
Issue Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
Poor time-alignment
by the radio
broadcaster.
None - broadcast
issue.
Sound fading or
blending in and out
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
None - reception issue
that may clear up as
you continue to drive.
Audio mute delay
when selecting
HD2/HD3, multicast
preset or direct tune.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
None - this is normal
behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
Cannot access
HD2/HD3 multicast
channel when recalling
a preset or from a
direct tune
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
None - the station is
not available in your
current location.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.*
No text information
shown for currently
selected frequency
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.*
HD2–HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2–HD7 channel
search.
None - this is normal
behavior.
*http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
Navigation System 379
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
HD radio voice commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune HD <1-8>”*
“Help”
*If you have said, “Tune”, refer to the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune HD <1-8>”
“Help”
380 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 satellite radio (if activated)
Press the RADIO hard button, then select SAT on the touch
screen.
When you select: You can:
SAT123 Access three different satellite radio modes
(SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3)
Scan Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all
satellite radio channels within the current
genre.
Scan Presets Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all
channels stored in the memory presets.
Channel Guide See a list of channels sorted by genre and also
skip or lock out certain channels. Select the
desired genre and choose a channel by
pressing the channel name button. You can
then choose to “Skip” or “Lock” a certain
channel. A skipped channel is not accessible
using the tune knob, scan or seek functions.
(To access the skipped channel, select ‘Direct
Tune’ and enter the channel number.) A
locked channel can only be accessed by
entering the “Channel Guide” and then
entering the system’s PIN.
Direct Tune Enter the desired satellite channel number
using the on-screen keypad.
Set Genre Allows you to choose from a list of genres.
Once a genre is chosen and you press SEEK,
it will only look for channels in that genre.
Navigation System 381
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Memo Allows you to save a song title and artist to
the system. When the saved song is playing
on any satellite radio channel, the system
alerts you with a pop-up in the lower status
bar. You can either tune to the station or
ignore the pop-up. When you are in the Memo
screen, the following options are available:
Refresh allows you to refresh the current
artist and title information.
Song Alert allows you to store the song
information displayed in the Title Field. When
the stored song is played in the future, an
audio and visual notification is initiated.
Artist Alert allows you to store the artist
information currently displayed in the Artist
Field. When that artist is played again, the
system alerts you with a pop-up.
Alert On/Off allows you to select Artists and
Titles that you would like the system to alert
you to when they are playing on other
channels.
Note: SIRIUS威 does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company
shall not be responsible for Alert feature
variation.
Show Presets Display presets at the bottom of the screen.
SIRIUS姞 satellite radio voice commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS威 satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS威 satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “SIRIUS”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“Sirius On”
“Sirius off”
382 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“SIRIUS”
“<0–233>”
“<Channel name>”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 3”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Seek up”
“Seek down ”
“Store preset <1–6>”
“Store SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“Store SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“Store SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“Tune”*
“Help”
*If you have said, “Tune”, refer to the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<0–233>”
“<Channel name>”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 3”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Help”
Navigation System 383
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 information
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS威
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle. Refer to your authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS威
satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN
to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is
found on the System Information Screen (SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To
access your ESN, press the I button on the navigation screen, then select
the System Info tab.
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
384 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result the audio
system muting.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
SIRIUS威 troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Acquiring Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS威
system failure
Internal module or
system failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel Channel no longer
available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS威 satellite or
SIRIUS威 tower to the
vehicle antenna.
The signal is currently
being blocked. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Navigation System 385
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS威 troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Updating Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威 Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
reactivate or resolve
subscription issues.
No Channels Available All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
Using the channel
guide, unlock or
unskip the channels.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS威 has updated
the channels available
for your vehicle.
No action required.
CD
Press the MEDIA hard button, then select the CD tab on the
touch screen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC appears
in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Track List and Record.
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Track List View a list of the tracks.
Record Save the CD or CD tracks into the Jukebox to
hear them played later.
386 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CD voice commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
CD voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Repeat”
“Repeat off”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle off”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Play folder <1–255>”
“Play folder <1–255> track <1–512>”
“Play next folder”
“Play previous folder”
“Folder mode”
“Folder mode off”
“Repeat track”
“Repeat folder”
“Help”
Navigation System 387
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MP3
Press the MEDIA hard button, then select the CD tab on the
touch screen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC appears
in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Folder Mode and Folder List.
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Folder Mode Listen to and seek through songs within the
current folder.
Folder List Access and view folders on the disc. Select
the root folder (if available), then any other
folder on the disc.
DVD
Note: Your system only plays NTSC formatted discs. PAL format is not
supported.
Your system allows you to play DVD audio and video discs. Make sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) (vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission)
or the parking brake is engaged (vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission). This allows you to be able to view and hear the DVD. If
the vehicle is moving, the video does not play.
When you select: You can:
Title Go to the disc’s main title screen.
Menu Go to the disc’s main menu.
Cursor Controls Navigate to the desired menu selections.
388 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Settings Adjust certain settings of the DVD player,
such as:
Video Display Settings allows you to adjust
the brightness and contrast. You can also
choose to return to the default settings by
pressing “Restore Default”.
Audio Language allows you to choose which
language you would like the DVD audio track
to play in.
Subtitle Display allows you to turn subtitles
on and off.
Subtitle Language allows you to choose
which language you would like the subtitles to
appear.
Aspect Ratio allows you to choose wide, full,
normal or cinema display.
Angle Mark Notification allows you to have
more viewing angles from which to select.
Once you have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm.
Search Go to a specific title or chapter using the
keypad.
Note: Some of the above settings are disc-dependent and availability
and operation may vary.
During disc play, you can also touch
the screen to access the “virtual
remote” which allows you to “Move
Controls” on the screen as well as
use the cursor controls, “Enter” and
“Return” to navigate and make
selections within the menus.
Dolby威 noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby威
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby威” and the double-D symbol
are registered trademarks of Dolby威 Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Navigation System 389
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disc voice commands
If you are listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Disc”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
Disc voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Menu”
“Title menu”
“Play next title”
“Play previous title”
“Play title <1–99>”
“Play next chapter”
“Play previous chapter”
“Play chapter <1–999>”
“Play next group”
“Play previous group”
“Play group <1–9>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat off”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle off”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Play folder <1–255>”
“Play folder <1–255> track <1–512>”
“Play next folder”
“Play previous folder”
“Folder mode”
“Folder mode off”
“Help”
390 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DVD voice commands
If you are watching a DVD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a DVD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “DVD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
DVD voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Menu”
“Menu title”
“Play next title”
“Play previous title”
“Play title <1–99>”
“Play next chapter”
“Play previous chapter”
“Play chapter <1–999>”
“Play next group”
“Play group <1–9>”
“Repeat”
“Repeat off”
“Play next track <1–512>”
“Play previous track”
Video CD voice commands
If you are watching a video CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a video CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Video CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
Video CD voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Help”
Navigation System 391
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Jukebox
Your system has a Jukebox feature which allows you to save desired
tracks or CDs to the hard drive for later access. The hard drive can store
up to 10 GB* (164 hours; approximately 2,472 tracks) of music. The
system contains a Gracenote威 media database that allows for display of
song title, album title, and album cover art. After saving music to the
hard drive, you can access and play your music by specific tracks, artists,
albums or genres. You can even choose to create and access your own
playlists.
*Note: 1 GB equals one billion bytes (1,000,000,000B).
Recording music to your jukebox
To record music to your jukebox:
1. Insert a CD, then select Record on the touch screen.
2. Select individual tracks or press Select All to record the entire CD.
Note: The system automatically saves all tracks if none are selected.
3. Press Start Recording.
The progress shows at the bottom of the screen.
Note: If you are not actively listening to the disc being recorded, the
record rate is much quicker (as fast as five minutes).
Accessing the music in your jukebox
Once you have saved music to your jukebox, you can then choose
different ways to play the music.
1. Press the MEDIA hard button on the navigation system.
2. Select the Jukebox tab on the touch screen. You can then select from
the following options:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
392 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Music library Access all of your saved music. You can
choose to view or play the material in the
following ways:
Play All Tracks allows you to play all tracks
saved in the jukebox.
Playlist allows you to play your own playlist.
Play genre allows you to have the system
play only music from a specific genre.
Play artist allows you to have the system
play only music by a specific artist.
Play album allows you to have the system
play only music from a specific album.
Options View your other options.
Edit Playlists allows you to edit your
playlists.
Edit Music Library Contents allows you to
make changes to the content in your music
library.
Update Album Information from CD
Database allows you to update the residing
album information from the Gracenote威
database if a recent software update was
performed.
Hard Disk Drive Information allows you to
access the system’s hard drive disc
information such as used/free space and total
capacity.
CD Database Information allows you to
access the CD database information.
Navigation System 393
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Creating a playlist
Press the MEDIA hard button, then select the Jukebox tab on the touch
screen.
1. Select Options.
2. Select Edit Playlists, then which playlist you would like to create.
3. Select which category you would like to access from your saved
music.
4. Select the desired songs and then press Add. The system shows you
the currently selected songs. You can choose to Edit Name to change
the name of the playlist, Delete Playlist to remove it, Add Tracks to
the playlist or Sort Playlist.
5. When you are done making any adjustments to the playlist, select
Edit Name to rename your playlist.
Jukebox voice commands
If you are listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the
voice button on the steering wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Jukebox”, then any of the commands in
the following chart.
Jukebox voice commands
“Play”
1
“Pause”
“Repeat”
“Repeat off”
“Shuffle”
“Shuffle off”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play genre <name>”
“Play artist <name>”
1
“Play album <name>”
1
“Play track <name>”
1
“Play playlist <name>”
“Play playlist <1–5>”
394 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Jukebox voice commands
“Search genre <name>”
2
“Search artist <name>”
2
“Search album <name>”
2
“Search track <name>”
2
“Refine album <name>”
3
“Refine artist <name>”
3
“Help”
1
These commands can be said at any time during listening to the
jukebox and after any of the search and refine commands.
2
While listening to the jukebox, press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, you may say any of these commands.
3
Your search can be narrowed beyond the search command by using
these commands.
USER DEVICE
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, there is a User Device tab. For
more information, refer to the SYNC威 chapter.
LINE IN (AUXILIARY INPUT JACK)
Your vehicle is equipped with an audio input jack which allows a portable
audio device to be plugged into your vehicle’s audio system. To turn this
feature on, press the MEDIA hard button on the system.
For more information on the auxiliary input jack, refer to Auxiliary
input jack (Line in) in the Audio Systems chapter.
Navigation System 395
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOUCHSCREEN CLIMATE CONTROLS
Press the CLIMATE hard button to access your climate control features.
Depending on your vehicle line and option package, your climate screen
may have different features than what is listed below .
Climate control features
Driver temperature Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Manual controls Select any of the following airflow distribution
modes:
Floor/Defrost distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents, demister vents,
floor vents and rear seat floor vents, and
provides outside air to reduce window
fogging.
Panel distributes air through the instrument
panel vents.
Panel/Floor distributes air through the
instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor
vents and rear seat floor vents.
Floor distributes air through the demister
vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Defrost distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and demister
vents. Touch to clear the windshield of fog
and thin ice. Touch again to return to the
previous airflow selection.
Fan speed Touch + or – to increase or decrease fan
speed.
Passenger
temperature
Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the
temperature.
Dual Touch to turn on the passenger side
temperature control.
MAX A/C Touch to cool the vehicle with recirculated air.
Touch again for normal A/C operation. MAX
A/C is more economical and efficient than
normal A/C mode.
396 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Climate control voice commands
If you are not viewing the climate control screen, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say “Climate”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
Climate control voice commands
“On”
“Off”
“Automatic”
“Dual off”
“A/C on”
“A/C off”
“Max A/C on”
“Max A/C off”
“Defrost”
“Defrost off”
“Rear Defrost”
“Rear defrost off”
“Recirc”
“Recirc off”
“Fan speed increase”
“Fan speed decrease”
“Temperature increase”
“Temperature decrease”
“Temperature <16.0–32.0>”
“Temperature <60–90>”
“Help”
Navigation System 397
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION MENU FEATURES
Under the Information menu, you can access features such as Where Am
I? and SIRIUS威 Travel Link™, view your calendar, see system information
and get basic system help.
Press the I (Information) hard button to access these features.
Where Am I?
Press the I button and select the Where Am I? tab. The system gives you
your current GPS location (latitude and longitude), the current street
you are on as well as the street in front and behind the vehicle position
along with distance information.
Note: Not all tab selections shown here will be available in all markets.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS姞 Travel Link™ (if equipped and if activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ (if activated) can help you locate the best gas
prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, access the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions and scores to current sports
games.
398 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press the information button and then select Sirius Travel
Link™, then choose from any of the following services:
When you select: You can:
Traffic On Route Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places (if programmed).
Traffic Nearby
My Places
Weather View the nearby weather, current weather, or
the 5–day forecast for the chosen area. Select
Weather Map to see storms, radar information,
charts and winds. Select Area to select from a
listing of weather locations. Also view ski
conditions for a specific area
Fuel Prices View fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation
route.
Movie Listings View nearby movie theaters and their show
times (if available).
Sports Info. View scores and schedules from a variety of
sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite
teams for easier access. The score
automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
SIRIUS姞 Travel Link™ voice commands
Press the voice button and, after the tone, say “Travel Link”,
then any of the commands in the following chart:
“Travel Link”
“Traffic”
“Weather map”
“Weather”
“5–day weather forecast”
“Movie listings”
“Fuel prices”
Navigation System 399
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“Travel Link”
“Sports schedules”*
“Sports scores”*
“Sports headlines”*
“Help”
*If you have said, “Sports scores” or “Sports schedules” or “Sports
headlines” you may say any of the commands in the following chart:
Sports-related commands
“NFL”
“College football”
“NHL”
“College basketball”
“NBA”
“WNBA”
“Baseball”
“Golf”
“MLS”
“My teams”
“Help”
Additional sports-related voice commands
“NFL scores” “NFL schedule”
“NFL headlines” “NBA scores”
“NBA schedule” “NBA headlines”
“NHL scores” “NHL schedule”
“NHL headlines” “Baseball scores”
“Baseball schedule” “Baseball headlines”
“College football scores” “College football schedule”
“College football headlines” “College basketball scores”
“College basketball schedule” “College basketball schedule”
“Motor sports order” “Motor sports schedule”
“Motor sports headlines” “Golf leaderboard”
“Golf schedule” “Golf headlines”
400 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional sports-related voice commands
“WNBA scores” “MLS scores”
“WNBA schedule” “MLS schedule”
“WNBA headlines” “MLS headlines”
“My teams scores” “My teams schedule”
“My team headlines” “Help”
Calendar
Press the information button, then select Calendar. You can
then select which month you would like to view by using the
arrow buttons selecting Go to Today.
You can view calendars from one previous year and the next 10 years.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
System information
Press the information button, then select System Information.
In this screen you can view the following options:
• Phone number for your Customer Service Center
• Current system versions installed
• Current SIRIUS威 Radio ESN
• SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ ESN
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
Navigation System 401
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Help
The Help screen allows you to view basic information about controls and
driving restrictions as well as traffic legend information and basic voice
commands available in various modes.
If you select: You can:
Basic Operation View hard buttons on your navigation system.
Press the desired icon to view the button
description.
Driving Restriction View the system’s driving restriction.
Traffic Legend View the color code for the Speed and Flow
of roads on the navigation system. You can
also select Traffic Incidents to help you
differentiate between viewed and unviewed
incidents.
Voice Commands View a brief listing of possible voice
commands in a specific mode.
SOUND FEATURES
The sound menu allows you to access and adjust settings such as Bass,
Treble, Fade, Balance, Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) and the
visualizer. Press the SOUND hard button.
When you select: You can:
Bass/Treble Increase or decrease levels by pressing + or -
.
Balance/Fade Adjust the sound between the left and right
speakers (Balance) and front and rear
speakers (Fade).
SCV Have the system automatically adjust radio
volume according to vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Select a
level of compensation between 1 and 7 by
pressing the corresponding button.
Visualizer Turn the audio visualizer display on or off.
Note: Turning the visualizer setting to off
does not remove the visualizer on the home
screen. You need to select a different view in
order to remove the visualizer.
402 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Your navigation system allows you to set a destination by using your
touch screen or voice commands.
The navigation system contains map coverage for the United States,
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, Canada and Mexico.
Disclaimer
A disclaimer appears once per ignition cycle when the DEST button is
pressed. Press Accept to agree to the terms and access navigation
functions. If you do not press Accept, you only have access to
non-navigation functions. The disclaimer has information similar to the
following:
• Always obey local traffic regulations.
• It is recommended to program the system only when stopped.
• Some functions are unavailable while the vehicle is in motion to help
minimize distraction.
• Periodic map updates are available at an additional cost.
Programming a destination using the touchscreen
1. Press the DEST hard button.
2. Select from the following:
• Quick: Allows you to cancel the route, access emergency destinations
(such as a hospital or police), save your favorite destinations to
presets for quick access, find the nearest point of interest (POI), and
also to use a previous destination or an entry from your address book
as a destination.
• Standard: Allows you to set a destination using any of the following:
Address Book, Previous Destination, Phone Number, Map, Street
Address, POI, Freeway Exit/Entrance or Intersection. Selections on
the standard screen are speed-dependent features.
• Edit Route: Allows you to make any adjustments to the currently
selected navigation route such as: Cancel, Detour, View Route, Edit
Route Preferences, Edit Traffic Preferences, Edit Destination/Way
Points and Edit Turn List.
Navigation System 403
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Programming a destination using voice commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel.
If you want to: Say:
Enter an address “Destination street address”
Enter an intersection “Destination intersection”
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its category
“Destination nearest <POI category>” or
“Destination nearest POI”
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its name
“Destination POI”
Go to a previous
destination
“Destination previous destination”
Go to your home
location
“Destination home”
Use a nametag from
your address book
“Destination <nametag>”
Get help “Help”
Note: If the system’s language is set to French or Spanish, the city and
street names need to be spelled. When in Spelling Mode, you may speak
letters or say, “Line #”. The system is designed to work even if you have
made a spelling error.
POI Categories
Your system offers a variety if POI (Points of Interest) categories.
Main categories
Food/Drink & Dining Automotive
Travel & Transportation Shopping
Financial Entertainment & Arts
Emergency Recreation & Sports
Community Government
Health & Medicine Domestic Services
404 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt. Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in front of the POI listing.
The system also allows you to sort the POIs alphabetically, by distance or
by cityseekr listings (if available).
Setting your navigation preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route. Press the NAV hard button.
When you select: You can:
Map Preferences Access and adjust map content such as Street
Name, Time to Destination, Speed Limit ,
Breadcrumbs, Points of Interest (POI) icons,
Map View, Bird’s Eye View and Turn List
Format.
Route Preferences Choose between Shortest Distance or Fastest
Time when navigating a route. Also select to
avoid freeways, toll roads ferries, etc.
Traffic Preferences Have the system color code roads according
to speed of traffic flow or add special icons to
the map for things such as road work,
accidents, etc.
You can also choose to receive traffic alerts.*
Navigation System 405
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Navigation
Preferences
Access and adjust guidance prompts, average
speed, fuel price display, calibration and
default settings.
Avoid Areas Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you.
The system does its best to avoid the items
and areas that have been set. There may be
some situations where it is impossible to
completely avoid the selection(s). For
example, if a destination or waypoint is
located in an area that is set to avoid, the
system cannot avoid it.
*Requires SIRIUS威 Travel Link™, which is only available in the U.S.
Map mode
Press the MAP hard button to view map mode. When in map mode, an
icon appears on the upper left side of the screen; this is a toggle button
to change the view of the map display.
Roads on the map are displayed in a variety of colors. Building footprints
display areas of major buildings in the 20 largest cities in the U.S. These
areas may be displayed depending on their size and the map zoom level.
Heading up always shows the direction of forward travel to be
upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to
2.5 mi (4 km). For larger map scales, this setting is remembered,
but the map is shown in North up only. If the scale returns below this
level, then Heading up is restored.
North up always shows the northern direction to be upward on
the screen.
Map icons
Vehicle mark shows current location of the vehicle. It stays in
the center of the map display, except when in scroll mode.
406 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the icon is fixed in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor is
in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicate the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any
method other than the map. A different icon can be selected from the 22
icons available; each icon can be used more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. Only one entry from the Address Book can be
saved as Home. This icon cannot be changed.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons can be displayed on the map
and can be turned on or off. There are about 56 subcategories of
POIs that can be selected to be displayed on the map one at a
time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map.
The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn
on the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may be
intermittently displayed under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
S
2
Navigation System 407
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Quick touch buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select: You can:
Set as Dest Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. (You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then press Set as Dest.)
Set as Waypoint Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save to Address
Book
Save the current location to the address book.
POI Icons On/Off Select POI icons to be displayed on the map.
Up to three icons can be selected for display
on the map at the same time.
View Traffic Adjust the map display to the right scale. This
scale allows the entire route to be visible in
the screen.
View/Edit Route Access these features when a route is active:
Cancel route
Edit route preferences
Edit destination/waypoints
View route
Edit traffic preferences*
Edit turn list
408 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Map Scrolling Single scroll mode allows you to press and
release on the map display to bring the
pressed position to the center of the screen.
The scroll mode will time out after five
minutes of inactivity.
Continuous scroll mode allows you to press
and hold to begin scrolling continuously in
one of eight directions closest to the point
that is pressed. The scroll continues until the
map is released, and increases in speed after
three seconds. This is not possible if the
vehicle is moving. The scroll mode will time
out after five minutes of inactivity.
*Requires SIRIUS Travel Link™ to be activated.
A scrolling circle appears in the
center of the screen when in 3D
map mode. Trace the circle with
your finger to rotate the map.
Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS or going to
www.navigation.com/ford. You need to specify the make and model of
your vehicle to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation System 409
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation voice commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone, say “Navigation”, then any of the
following commands:
Navigation system voice commands
“Repeat instruction” “Detour”
“Cancel route” “Cancel next waypoint”
“Show turn list” “Show route”
Show destination Show next waypoint
“Show map” “Show north up”
Show heading up “Select map POI icons”
“Voice on” “Voice off”
“Voice volume increase” “Voice volume decrease”
“Zoom in” “Zoom out”
“Destination”* “Destination home”
“Destination <nametag>” “Destination <POI category>”
“Destination POI” “Destination nearest <POI category>”
“Destination street address” “Destination intersection”
“Destination previous
destination”
“Destination nearest POI”
“Play Nametags” “Help”
*If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
“DESTINATION”
“Home”
“<nametag>”
“Street address”
“Intersection”
“Previous destination”
“POI”
“<POI category>”
“POI category”
“Nearest <POI category>”
“Nearest POI”
“Help”
410 Navigation System
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting
Symptoms Possible Cause Action
Focus Error System unable to play
reproduced disc.
Contact your dealer.
Bad Disc Disc was inserted
upside down or the
system is unable to
read the information
on the disc.
The system
automatically ejects
the disc.
Track Error The system is unable
to reproduce a corrupt
MP3 file.
The system skips the
corrupted track.
Invalid Disc Detected Dirty CD/DVD or
unsupported format
Wipe the CD/DVD with
a dry, soft cloth from
the center to the outer
edge of the disc.
Address Not
Found/Address Range
Does Not Exist. Show
the midpoint of the
street? (Popup
window)
The house number
entered is not
registered in the
database.
Press NO and enter a
valid number for the
specified street, or
press YES to view the
middle point of the
street.
Navigation Fault. A
system fault has been
detected that may
cause the navigation to
perform abnormally.
Please contact your
dealership. (Popup
window)
System hardware or
software error
Contact your dealer.
Error. PINs did not
match. Please re-enter.
(Popup window)
A different PIN was
entered to unlock the
system for valet mode.
Press OK and try
entering PIN again. If
unable, contact your
dealer.
Invalid PIN. Please
Re-enter. (Popup
window)
System does not
recognize PIN as valid.
Press OK and enter
different PIN to lock
the system.
Navigation System 411
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC姞 End User License Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
(“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THRID PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as
⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
412 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
•
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble
nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
•
SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all
component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if
applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer
must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
Appendices 413
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded
to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
414 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third party
sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE
as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or suppliers.
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed
materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
Appendices 415
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as
well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THRID PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
416 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
End user notice
Microsoft姞 Windows姞 Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide can
lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change system
settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these
operations. This is important since while setting up or changing some
functions you might be required to distract your attention away from
the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
Appendices 417
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
General Operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while
you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to
access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has
been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
418 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may
pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that
otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to
comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal
judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places
you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider
to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input
destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your
vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
Appendices 419
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful
purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not
interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any
safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the
TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your
failure to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav
with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself,
and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense,
to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to
access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon
any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure
purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other
parties.
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade
names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings;
(d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity
or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute,
ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations
related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity
420 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such
high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
Appendices 421
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR 09/22/09
- 10 of 19 - Confidential GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE
LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered
by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of
the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award
rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having
jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both
TeleNav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign
this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
422 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav
and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav
Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by
implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and
its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav
all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required
disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices
by posting them on TeleNav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to
your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive
Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav
Software.
8.4 TeleNav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall
not affect that party’s right to require performance at any time
thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of
the provision itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will
be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference
only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be
referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words “include” and
“including,” and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of
limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to TeleNav’s third party vendor licensors:
Appendices 423
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use, resell
or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement,
and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must contact your
retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) within thirty (30) days
of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To contact NT, please
visit www.navteq.com.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including: 娀 Her Majesty the Queen in Right
of Canada, 娀 Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀 Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase 威.
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service 威
to publish and sell ZIP+4 威 information.
娀 United States Postal Service 威 2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service 威. The
following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal,
noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or
other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree
not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
424 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if:
(a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on
use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use
it at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained
from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error
free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion
may not apply to you.
Appendices 425
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA;
OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS,
OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN
IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent
the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to
submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder.
426 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User
License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer,
federal government agency, or any federal official must notify NAVTEQ
prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote姞 Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote姞 End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
Appendices 427
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music
file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide, including any
copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each company’s own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA
AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.”
NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY
428 Appendices
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND
SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN
THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY
CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT
THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS
NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR
ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS
ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Appendices 429
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ..............................337
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................173
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............329
Accessing the help screen .......402
Accessing the music in your
jukebox ......................................392
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................348
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................330
Accessory delay ..........................84
Active call menu options .........329
Advanced menu options ...........336
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................336
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................45
and child safety seats ..............46
description ................................45
disposal ......................................53
driver airbag ..............................45
passenger airbag .......................45
side airbag ...........................45, 50
Air cleaner filter .......241–242, 295
Air conditioning ........................130
manual heating and air
conditioning system ...............130
AM/FM .......................................372
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................173
Anti-theft system ..................68, 70
arming the system ..............68, 71
disarming a triggered
system .......................................72
AppLink™ .................................344
Audio system
CD-MP3 ...................................119
Audio system
(see Radio) ................................119
Automatic transmission ............165
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................165
fluid, adding ............................236
fluid, checking ........................236
fluid, refill capacities ..............292
fluid, specification ..................292
Selectshift (SST) ....................166
Auxiliary input jack
(Line in) ....................................124
Auxiliary powerpoint ................150
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........292
refill capacities ........................292
traction lok ..............................171
B
Battery .......................................238
acid, treating emergencies .....238
jumping a disabled battery ....209
maintenance-free ....................238
replacement,
specifications ..........................295
servicing ..................................238
Blind spot mirror ......................396
Booster seats ...............................22
Brakes ........................................173
anti-lock ...................................173
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................173
430 Index
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
brake warning light ................173
fluid, checking and adding ....237
fluid, refill capacities ..............292
fluid, specifications .................292
lubricant specifications ..........292
parking ....................................174
shift interlock ..........................167
trailer .......................................195
C
Capacities for refilling
fluids ..........................................292
Car2U威 Home Automation
System .......................................146
CD ..............................................119
CD player ..................................117
CD voice commands ................387,
390–391
Cell phone use ............................15
Changing a tire .........................277
Child safety restraints ..........27, 29
Child safety seats
attaching with tether straps ....29
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................36
LATCH .......................................27
Child safety seats -
booster seats ...............................22
Cleaning the touchscreen ........367
Cleaning your vehicle ...............248
engine compartment ..............250
instrument panel ....................252
interior .....................................252
interior trim ............................348
plastic parts ............................249
washing ....................................248
waxing .....................................250
wheels ......................................254
wiper blades ............................251
Climate control
(see Air conditioning or
Heating) .....................................130
Clock ..........................................119
Clutch
fluid ..........................................237
operation while driving ..........168
recommended shift speeds ....169
Compass, electronic ..................115
calibration ...............................116
set zone adjustment ...............116
Connecting a digital media
player to SYNC威 .......................346
Console ......................................151
Convertible
cleaning ...................................250
closing the top ........................202
installation of the boot ...........199
opening the top ......................198
Coolant
checking and adding ..............232
refill capacities ........................292
specifications ..........................292
Creating a playlist .....................394
Customer Assistance ................207
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................300, 303
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............216
Getting roadside assistance ...207
Getting the service you
need .........................................212
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................218
Index 431
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................216
Customizing your home
screen ........................................365
D
Defrost ...............................130, 132
rear window ............................136
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................236
engine oil .................................231
Driving under special
conditions ..................................168
through water .........................204
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .........................132
E
Electronic message center .........96
Electronic stability control ......178
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................209
running out of fuel .................158
Emission control system ..........162
End user license agreement ....412
Engine ........................................291
cleaning ...................................250
fail-safe cooling .......................235
idle speed control ...................238
lubrication specifications .......292
refill capacities ........................292
service points ..................229–230
Engine block heater .................154
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............231
dipstick ....................................231
filter, specifications ................295
refill capacities ........................292
specifications ..........................292
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................154
F
Fail safe cooling ........................235
Fleet MyKey programming ........57
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....156
Floor mats .................................205
Fluid capacities .........................292
Fuel
calculating fuel economy .........97
cap ...........................................160
capacity ...................................292
choosing the right fuel ...........157
filler funnel .............................158
filling your vehicle with fuel ..160
filter, specifications ........237, 295
fuel pump shut-off ..................209
octane rating ...................157, 291
running out of fuel .................158
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................156
Fuel and distance computer ....107
outside temperature
indicator ..................................107
to empty indicator ..................107
trip distance ............................107
trip/reset button .....................107
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................................156
Fuses ..................................220–221
432 Index
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............160
Gauges ...........................89–90, 108
odometer .................................107
trip odometer ..........................107
H
Hazard flashers .........................208
HD Radio™ ...............................375
Headlamps
aiming ......................................242
bulb specifications ..................247
flash to pass ..............................77
high beam .................................77
Head restraints .........................138
Heating ..............................130, 132
Hill start assist ..........................171
Hood ..........................................228
I
Ignition ...............................153, 291
Illuminated visor mirror .......86–87
Information displays ...................96
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................164
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................252
cluster ........................................91
J
Jack ............................................277
positioning ...............................277
storage .....................................277
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....329
Jukebox features .......................392
Jump-starting your vehicle ......209
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................64
Keys .......................................54, 69
positions of the ignition .........153
L
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................247
headlamps, flash to pass ..........77
interior lamps ...........................81
LATCH anchors ...........................27
Lights, warning and indicator ....91
Limited slip axle
(see Traction Loc) ....................171
Loading pictures .......................365
Load limits .................................187
Locks
autolock .....................................64
doors ..........................................63
Lubricant specifications ...........292
Lug nuts ....................................290
M
Manual transmission .................168
fluid capacities ........................292
lubricant specifications ..........292
reverse .....................................170
Map icons ..................................406
Index 433
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Map mode ..................................406
Map updates ..............................409
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................351
Message center ...........................96
display color ............................101
english/metric button .............101
MyColor display ......................101
system check button ..............101
warning messages ...........101, 111
Mirrors ...................................84, 86
side view mirrors (power) .......84
Motorcraft威 parts ..............248, 295
MyKey ..........................................57
N
Navigation features ...................403
O
Octane rating ............................157
P
Pairing other phones ................327
Pairing your phone for the
first time ....................................326
Parental MyKey programming ...57
Parking brake ............................174
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........295
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................335
Phone redial ..............................330
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist, tracks,
similar) ......................................349
POI categories ...........................404
Point of Interest (POI) .............404
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................221
Power door locks ........................63
Power mirrors .............................84
Powerpoint ................................150
Power steering ..........................185
Power Windows ...........................82
Privacy information ..................323
Putting a call on/off hold .........329
Q
Quick touch buttons .................408
R
Radio ..........................................119
CD-MP3 ...................................119
Radio reception .........................117
Radio voice commands .....373, 380
Rear view camera display ........180
Rear window defroster .....130, 132
Receiving a text message .........331
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................23
Relays ................................220–221
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................65
locking/unlocking doors ...........63
434 Index
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
opening the trunk .....................64
replacing the batteries .............55
Reverse sensing system ...........180
Roadside assistance ..................207
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............41
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............35
Safety defects, reporting ..........219
Safety information ....................322
Safety restraints ....................35–36
Belt-Minder威 .............................38
extension assembly ..................38
for adults .............................35–36
for children .........................19, 23
safety belt maintenance ...........41
seat belt maintenance ..............41
warning light and chime ..........38
Safety restraints -
LATCH anchors ...........................27
Safety seats for children ......19, 23
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................297
Satellite Radio ...................119, 384
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............309
SD card ......................................403
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............35
Seats ..........................................144
child safety seats ................19, 23
front seats .......................140, 142
heated ......................................143
second row seats ....................144
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................68
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........348
Setting a destination ................403
Setting the clock .......................119
SIRIUS威 satellite
radio ...........................119, 381, 402
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................382
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................398
SOS Post Crash Alert .................44
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................291, 295
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................292
Stability system .........................178
Starting your vehicle ................153
jump starting ..........................209
Status bars ................................364
Steering wheel ............................73
controls ......................................74
tilting .........................................73
Sunshade .....................................88
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................45
Supported media file types ......348
SYNC威 AppLink™ ....................344
SYNC威 customer support .........322
SYNC威 Services .........................342
System overview ...............358, 361
Index 435
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) .......130, 132
Temporary mobility kit .............282
Text messaging .........................331
Text messaging
(sending, downloading,
deleting) ............................332–333
Tilt steering wheel ......................73
Tires ...........................257–258, 277
alignment ................................271
care ..........................................257
changing ..........................277, 279
checking the pressure ............267
inflating ...................................265
label .........................................264
replacing ..................................269
rotating ....................................271
safety practices .......................270
sidewall information ...............260
snow tires and chains ............272
spare tire .................................277
Temporary mobility kit ..........282
terminology .............................258
tire grades ...............................258
treadwear ........................257, 267
Touchscreen features
(climate) ....................................396
Towing .......................194, 196–197
recreational towing .................197
trailer towing ..........................194
wrecker ....................................196
Traction control ........................175
Traction-lok rear axle ...............171
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................342
Transmission
automatic operation ...............165
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....167
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................236
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................237
fluid, refill capacities ..............292
lubricant specifications ..........292
Troubleshooting ........................411
Trunk ...........................................67
remote release ....................64, 66
Turn signal ..................................81
U
USB port ............................126, 346
Using privacy mode ..................329
V
Vehicle health report ................340
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................296
Vehicle loading ..........................187
Ventilating your vehicle ...........154
Visor storage system ..................87
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................347
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................327
Voice recognition ......................367
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......91
Washer fluid ..............................238
Water, Driving through .............204
436 Index
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Where am I? ..............................398
Windows
power .........................................82
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................76
checking and adding fluid .....238
replacing wiper blades ...........240
Wrecker towing .........................196
Index 437
2013 05+ Mustang (197)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
